Roland JUNO-X Parameter Guide

Page 1
Parameter Guide
© 2022 Roland Corporation
01
Page 2
Contents
Scene Parameter
ÄSCENE COMMON
ÄSCENE PART
ÄSCENE ZONE
ÄSCENE PART MFX
ÄSCENE EFFECT: Dly
Delay Parameters
ÄSCENE EFFECT: Rev
Reverb Parameters
ÄSCENE EFFECT: Cho
Chorus Parameters
ÄSCENE EFFECT: OD
ÄARP COMMON
ÄARP PART
.................................... 13
Tone Parameters
ÄTONE COMMON Parameters
ÄTONE Parameters
ÄTONE RD SYMPATHETIC RESO Parameter
.............................. 3
.............................. 3
.................................. 4
.................................. 6
.............................. 6
(Delay)
....................... 7
................................ 7
(Reverb)
....................... 8
............................... 8
(Chorus)
...................... 9
............................... 9
(Overdrive)
..................... 11
................................ 11
.............................. 16
..................... 16
.............................. 18
........... 30
MFX Parameters
ÄMFX List
ÄMFX Common Parameters
ÄFilter
ÄPhaser
ÄFlanger
ÄChorus
ÄModulation
ÄDrive / Amp
ÄComp / Limiter
ÄDelay
ÄLooper
ÄLo-Fi
ÄPitch
ÄCombination
ÄNote
..................................... 36
........................................ 37
....................................... 41
...................................... 43
...................................... 44
........................................ 54
...................................... 58
........................................ 59
........................................ 59
........................................ 72
.............................. 36
................................... 46
.................................. 49
................................ 52
................................. 60
....................... 37
System Parameters
ÄSystem Parameters
ÄSYSTEM EFFECT: Dly
ÄSYSTEM EFFECT: Rev
ÄSYSTEM EFFECT: Cho
ÄSYSTEM EQ/COMP
ÄSYSTEM COLOR SET
ÄMODEL ASSIGN
............................... 35
............................ 31
............................ 31
........................... 34
........................... 34
........................... 34
............................. 34
............................ 35
2
Page 3
Part1
Part2
Part3
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part3
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value0
127
Part1
Part2
Part3
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part3
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127

Scene Parameter

SCENE COMMON

Parameter Value Explanation
Scene Level
Tempo
ASSIGN
SL1–SL2
S1–S3 Func
0–127 Adjusts the overall volume of the scene.
20.00–300.00
Species the tempo of the scene (including the arpeggio).
SL1, SL2 function assignments
OFF No function is assigned.
CC01–CC95 Controller number 1–95
AFT Aftertouch
BEND DOWN
BEND UP
Applies the same eect as when the pitch bend wheel is moved downward.
Applies the same eect as when the pitch bend wheel is moved upward.
CHO LEVEL Chorus level is assigned.
REV LEVEL Reverb level is assigned.
DLY LEVEL Delay level is assigned.
ARP SHUFFLE I-ARP’s G-Shue parameter is assigned.
ARP DURATION I-ARP’s G-Duration parameter is assigned.
Continuously control the level of parts 1–4.
PART FADE1
Continuously control the level of parts 1–4.
PART FADE2
LEVEL P-1–P-R Each part’s volume is assigned.
AGE The SYSTEM > AGE parameter is assigned.
S1-S3 function assignments
OFF No function is assigned.
CC01–CC95 Controller number 1–95
AFT Aftertouch
MONO/POLY Monophonic/polyphonic switch is assigned.
SCENE DOWN (
SCENE UP (
TONE DOWN (
TONE UP (
PANEL DEC (
) Switch the scene to the previous number.
) Switch the scene to the next number.
) Switch the tone to the previous number.
) Switch the tone to the next number.
) Decreases the parameter’s value.
PANEL INC Increases the parameter’s value.
CHO SW Chorus on/o is assigned.
REV SW Reverb on/o is assigned.
DLY SW Delay on/o is assigned.
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s
)
ARP SW (
ARP HOLD (
DETECT KEYS (
I-ARPEGGIO [ON] button is pressed.
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s
)
I-ARPEGGIO [HOLD] button is pressed.
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s
)
I-ARPEGGIO [KEYS] button is pressed.
Parameter Value Explanation
DETECT BEAT (
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s
)
I-ARPEGGIO [BEAT] button is pressed.
UNISON SW Unison on/o is assigned.
BEND MODE Switches the bend mode.
Executes tuning for the voice slot of a model that simulates an analog synthesizer.
)
AUTO TUNING (
S1–S3 Func
TAP TEMPO (
START/STOP (
The tuning will be corrected in a few seconds, but will subsequently return to the pitch discrepancies specied by the tone parameters.
) Sets the tap tempo function.
) Starts/stops the step editor.
DRV SW Overdrive on/o is assigned.
When the Vocoder tone is selected, this selects
VOC/MIC
whether to use the vocoder sound or the mic input sound.
Species the operation of the button.
* Buttons to which a function marked with “ ” is assigned will operate in LATCH
mode regardless of this setting.
S1–S3 Mode
LATCH
MOMENTARY
The assigned function is switched each time you press the button.
The assigned function is eective only while you hold down the button.
Hold pedal function assignments
OFF No function is assigned.
CC01–CC95 Controller number 1–95
AFT Aftertouch
MONO/POLY Monophonic/polyphonic switch is assigned.
SCENE DOWN Switch the scene to the previous number.
SCENE UP Switch the scene to the next number.
TONE DOWN Switch the tone to the previous number.
TONE UP Switch the tone to the next number.
PANEL DEC Decreases the parameter’s value.
PANEL INC Increases the parameter’s value.
CHO SW Chorus on/o is assigned.
REV SW Reverb on/o is assigned.
DLY SW Delay on/o is assigned.
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s I-ARPEGGIO [ON] button is pressed.
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s I-ARPEGGIO [HOLD] button is pressed.
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s I-ARPEGGIO [KEYS] button is pressed.
Applies the same eect as when the panel’s I-ARPEGGIO [BEAT] button is pressed.
Hold
ARP SW
ARP HOLD
DETECT KEYS
DETECT BEAT
UNISON SW Unison on/o is assigned.
BEND MODE Switches the bend mode.
Executes tuning for the voice slot of a model that simulates an analog synthesizer.
AUTO TUNING
The tuning will be corrected in a few seconds, but will subsequently return to the pitch discrepancies specied by the tone parameters.
TAP TEMPO Sets the tap tempo function.
START/STOP Starts/stops the step editor.
DRV SW Overdrive on/o is assigned.
When the Vocoder tone is selected, this selects
VOC/MIC
whether to use the vocoder sound or the mic input sound.
Species the polarity of the pedal connected to the HOLD jack.
Hold Pole
STANDARD Species standard polarity.
REVERSE Species reverse polarity.
3
Page 4
Scene Parameter
Part1
Part2
Part3
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part3 Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value0
127
Part1
Part2
Part3
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part3 Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value
0
127
Part1
Part4
expression 127
expression 0
Value0
127
Parameter Value Explanation
Ctrl pedal function assignments
OFF No function is assigned.
CC01–CC95 Controller number 1–95
AFT Aftertouch
BEND DOWN
BEND UP
Applies the same eect as when the pitch bend wheel is moved downward.
Applies the same eect as when the pitch bend wheel is moved upward.
CHO LEVEL Chorus level is assigned.
REV LEVEL Reverb level is assigned.
DLY LEVEL Delay level is assigned.
ARP SHUFFLE I-ARP’s G-Shue parameter is assigned.
ARP DURATION I-ARP’s G-Duration parameter is assigned.
Continuously control the level of parts 1–4.
Ctrl
PART FADE1
Continuously control the level of parts 1–4.
PART FADE2
LEVEL P-1–P-R Each part’s volume is assigned.
AGE The SYSTEM > AGE parameter is assigned.
Part XFade Pos
0–127
This parameter stores the current value of PART FADE as a scene setting.
CTRL SOURCE
OFF, CC01–CC31,
CtrlSrc1–4
CC33–CC95, BEND,
Specify the MIDI messages used for tone control.
AFT
VOICE RSRV
Part1–5
0–10
Species the number of voices reserved for each part when the performance exceeds the maximum polyphony.

SCENE PART

Parameter Value Explanation
Part Level
Pan
Rev Send
Cho Send
Delay Send
Output
Part Sw
Mute Sw
PITCH
Coarse Tune
Fine Tune
Oct Shift
Bend Range
Part 1–4 only
Bend Mode
Part 1–4 only
MODIFY
Cuto
Resonance
Attack
Decay
Release
Vib Rate
Part 1–4 only
Vib Depth
Part 1–4 only
Vib Delay
Part 1–4 only
0–127 Species the volume of each part.
L64–63R
Species the pan of each part’s sound when outputting in stereo.
0–127 Species the send level to reverb.
0–127 Species the send level to chorus.
0–127 Species the send level to delay.
THRU, DRIVE
OFF, ON
Species whether the output of each part goes through the OVER DRIVE eect (DRIVE) or does not go through it (THRU).
Species whether the part is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
OFF, MUTE Species the part mute setting.
-48–+48 Shifts the pitch in units of a semitone.
-50–+50 Finely adjusts the pitch in units of one cent.
-3–+3
Shifts the pitch of the keyboard in units of one octave.
Species the range of pitch change controlled by
0–24, TONE
pitch bend, in semitone units. To use the setting of the tone, choose TONE.
Species the behavior when the pitch bend controller is operated.
NORMAL The conventional pitch bend eect occurs.
The pitch bend eect applies only to the
last-played note. If a note-on occurs while pitch C+L (CATCH + LAST)
bend is already applied, the new note sounds at
the center pitch. The pitch starts changing only
after the controller passes through the center
position.
TONE The tone’s settings are used.
Adjusts how far the lter is open.
-64–+63
Increasing this value makes the sound brighter,
and decreasing it makes the sound darker.
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region
of the cuto frequency, adding character to the
-64–+63
sound. Excessively high settings can produce
oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
Increasing this value strengthens the character,
and decreasing it weakens the character.
Adjusts the time over which the sound reaches its
-64–+63
maximum volume after you press the key.
Higher values produce a milder attack; lower
values produce a sharper attack.
Adjusts the time over which the volume decreases
from its maximum value.
-64–+63
Larger settings of this value make the decay
longer, and smaller settings make the decay
shorter.
The time it takes after the key is released for a
sound to become inaudible.
-64–+63
Larger settings of this value make the sound
linger, and smaller settings make the sound end
more sharply.
Adjusts the vibrato speed (the rate at which the
pitch is modulated).
-64–+63
The pitch will be modulated more rapidly for
higher settings, and more slowly with lower
settings.
Adjusts the depth of the vibrato eect (the depth
-64–+63
at which the pitch is modulated).
The pitch will be modulated more greatly for
higher settings, and less with lower settings.
Adjusts the time until vibrato (pitch modulation)
starts to apply.
-64–+63
Higher settings will produce a longer delay
time before vibrato begins, while lower settings
produce a shorter time.
4
Page 5
Scene Parameter
21 3 4
Parameter Value Explanation
CTRL
Mono/Poly
Part 1–4 only
Legato Sw
Part 1–4 only
Porta Sw
Part 1–4 only
Porta Time
Part 1–4 only
Unison Sw
Part 1–4 only
Velo Sens
Voice Assign
KBD Velo
KBD Fixed Velo
Velo Curve
MONO, POLY, TONE
OFF, ON, TONE
OFF, ON, TONE
0–127, TONE
OFF, ON, TONE
-63–+63
Sets the way sounds are played when the same key is pressed a number of times.
SINGLE
LIMIT
FULL
REAL, FIXED
1–127
OFF, 1–4
Choose “MONO” if you want the tone assigned to the part to play monophonically, or “POLY” if you want to play it polyphonically. To use the setting of the tone, choose “ TONE.”
Legato can be applied when playing monophonically. “Legato” is a playing technique that smooths the transition between notes, minimizing the sense of a gap between them. The eect is similar to the guitar performance techniques of hammering-on and pulling-o. Choose “ON” to apply legato, or “OFF” if not. Choose “TONE” if you want to use the setting specied by the tone.
Species whether portamento is applied. Select “ON” to apply portamento, or “OFF” if you don’t want to apply portamento. Choose “TONE” if you want to use the setting specied by the tone.
When portamento is used, this species the time over which the pitch will change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time. Choose “TONE” if you want to use the setting specied by the tone.
This layers a single sound. Choose “ON” if you want to play using unison, or “OFF” if not. Choose “TONE” if you want to use the setting specied by the tone.
Adjusts the velocity sensitivity. Larger settings raise the sensitivity.
Only one sound can be played at a time when the same key is pressed. With continuous sounds where the sound plays for an extended time, the previous sound is stopped when the following sound is played.
Layer the sound of the same keys. If long-sustaining notes are played consecutively, the previous notes are turned o after a certain number of notes accumulate.
Layer the sound of the same keys. Even with continuous sounds where the sound plays for an extended time without previously played sounds being eliminated.
Species whether the velocity value changes according to the actual strength of your playing (REAL) or is always a xed velocity value regardless of how you play (FIXED).
Species the velocity value when KBD Velo is “FIXED.”
For each part, select one of the following four velocity curves as appropriate for the playing touch of your MIDI keyboard. If you want to use the velocity curve of this unit’s keyboard, choose “OFF.”
Parameter Value Explanation
MIDI
Rx PC
Rx Bank
Rx Bend
Rx Poly Pres
Rx Ch Pres
Rx Mod
Rx Volume
Rx Pan
Rx Exp
Rx Hold-1
Rx Ch
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
1–16
Species whether program change is received
(ON) or not received (OFF).
Species whether bank select is received (ON) or
not received (OFF).
Species whether pitch bend is received (ON) or
not received (OFF).
Species whether polyphonic aftertouch is
received (ON) or not received (OFF).
Species whether channel aftertouch is received
(ON) or not received (OFF).
Species whether modulation is received (ON) or
not received (OFF).
Species whether volume is received (ON) or not
received (OFF).
Species whether pan is received (ON) or not
received (OFF).
Species whether expression is received (ON) or
not received (OFF).
Species whether hold 1 is received (ON) or not
received (OFF).
Species the MIDI receive channel of each part.
* If Tx Mode is ON, this is also used as the MIDI transmit
channel setting.
SCALE
Part 1–4 only
CUSTOM Custom: This lets you create a custom scale.
Equal Temperament: This tuning divides an
octave into 12 equal parts.
Every interval produces about the same amount
of slight dissonance.
Just (Major): This scale eliminates dissonance in
fths and thirds. It is unsuited to playing melodies
and cannot be transposed, but is capable of
beautiful sonorities.
Just (Minor): The scales of the major and minor
just intonations are dierent. You can get the
same eect with the minor scale as with the
major scale.
Pythagorean: This scale, devised by the
philosopher Pythagoras, eliminates dissonance in
fourths and fths.
Dissonance is produced in thirds, but melodies
are euphonious.
Kirnberger: This scale is a modication of the
meantone and just intonations that permits
greater freedom in transposition to other keys.
Performances are possible in all keys (III).
Meantone: This scale makes some compromises
in just intonation, enabling transposition to other
keys.
Werckmeister: This is a combination of the
Meantone and Pythagorean scales.
Performances are possible in all keys (rst
technique, III).
Sets the keynote.
Type
Key
C–B
EQUAL
JUST-MAJ
JUST-MIN
PYTHAGORE
KIRNBERGE
MEANTONE
WERCKMEIS
ARABIC Arabic Scale: This scale is suitable for Arabic music.
C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B
-64–+63 Finely adjusts the pitch.
EQ
Switch
In Gain
Low Gain
Low Freq
Mid Gain
Mid Freq
Mid Q
OFF, ON Turns the equalizer (EQ) on/o.
-24–+24 [dB]
-24–+24 [dB]
20–16000 [Hz]
-24–+24 [dB]
20–16000 [Hz]
0.5–16.0
Species the amount of boost/cut for the input
sound.
Species the amount of boost/cut for the
low-frequency region.
Species the frequency of the low-frequency
region.
Species the amount of boost/cut for the
mid-frequency region.
Species the frequency of the mid-frequency
region.
Species the width of the mid-frequency region.
Higher values produce a narrower width.
5
Page 6
Scene Parameter
Parameter Value Explanation
High Gain
High Freq
-24–+24 [dB]
20–16000 [Hz]
Species the amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency region.
Species the frequency of the high-frequency region.

SCENE ZONE

Parameter Value Explanation
Keyboard Sw
Key Rng Low
Key Rng Upp
Key Fade Low
Key Fade Upp
Velo Rng Low
Velo Rng Upp
Velo FadeLow
Velo FadeUpp
Ctrl Rx
Rx S1 -S3
Rx SL1 -SL2
Rx HoldPdl
Rx CtrlPdl
Master Kbd
Tx Mode
Mkb Ch
Mkb MSB
Mkb LSB
Mkb PC
Mkb Volume
OFF, ON Turns on/o the part played by the keyboard.
C-–G9
C-–G9
0–127
0–127
1–127
1–127
0–127
0–127
* If a function that is not in units of an individual part is assigned to a controller,
the operation is received regardless of the setting.
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
ON, OFF, MKB
1–16
OFF, 0–127
OFF, 0–127
OFF, 1–128
OFF, 0–127 Adjusts the volume of an external MIDI device.
Set the keyboard range in which each part will sound. Make these settings when you want dierent key ranges to play dierent tones. Specify the lower limit (Key Rng Low) and upper limit (Key Rng Upp) of the key range.
Species the degree to which the part is sounded by notes played below the Key Rng Low. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Species the degree to which the part is sounded by notes played above the Key Rng Upp. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Specify the lower limit (Velo Rng Low) and upper limit (Velo Rng Upp) of the velocities that will sound the tone. Make these settings when you want dierent tones to sound depending on keyboard playing dynamics.
Species the degree to which the part is sounded by notes played more softly than Velo Rng Low. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Species the degree to which the part is sounded by notes played more strongly than Velo Rng Upp. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Species whether [S1]–[S3] button operations are received (ON) or not received (OFF).
Species whether [SL1], [SL2] slider operations are received (ON) or not received (OFF).
Species whether hold pedal operations are received (ON) or not received (OFF).
Species whether Ctrl pedal operations are received (ON) or not received (OFF).
Species whether MIDI messages are transmitted (ON) or not transmitted (OFF). If you’re using this unit as a master keyboard, choose “MKB.”
Species the transmit channel for MIDI messages of the keyboard part.
Here you can enter numerical values for program number and bank select MSB/LSB to switch sounds on an external MIDI device.

SCENE PART MFX

Parameter Value Explanation
FllwToneMFX
Categ
Type
Switch
MFX Parameters
Cho Send
Rev Send
Src1–4
Sens1–4
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
Ø“MFX List” (p. 36)
Ø“MFX List” (p. 36)
OFF, ON Switches the MFX on/o.
Ø“MFX List” (p. 36)
0–127
0–127
Species the MIDI message that will control the corresponding MFX CONTROL parameter.
OFF MFX CONTROL will not be used.
CC01–31 Controller number 1–31
CC33–95 Controller number 33–95
BEND Pitch bend
AFT Aftertouch
SYS-CTRL1–4
-63–+63
Ø“MFX List” (p. 36)
* These parameters are not shown if the model assigned to the part is RD-PIANO.
If this is “OFF,” the following parameters are
shown.
Adjusts the amount of chorus.
If you don’t want to add the chorus eect, set it
to “0.”
Adjusts the amount of reverb.
If you don’t want to add the reverb eect, set it to
“0.”
Use the controller that is assigned by the System
Control Source 1–4.
Species the depth of MFX CONTROL.
Specify a positive (+) value if you want to change
the value of the assigned destination in a positive
direction (larger, toward the right, faster, etc.), or
specify a negative (-) value if you want to change
the value in a negative direction (smaller, toward
the left, slower, etc.). Larger values will allow a
greater amount of control.
6
Page 7
Scene Parameter

SCENE EFFECT: Dly (Delay)

If the “SYSTEM EFFECT: Dly” (p. 34) Source parameter is set to “SCENE,” the following parameters are shown, allowing you to edit the delay type and other parameters.
If the parameter is set to “SYS,” the screen indicates “Source is System.,” and the following parameters are not shown.
Parameter Value Explanation
Switch
DlyType
Level
Rev Send

Delay parameters

Delay Parameters
00
01
This is a stereo delay.
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Feedback
HF Damp
02
OFF, ON Switches the delay on/o.
Ø“Delay Parameters” (p. 7)
0–127
0–127 Species the send level to reverb.
Edit the parameters of the selected delay. The available parameters dier depending on the type of chorus you selected in DlyType.
Ø“Delay Parameters” (p. 7)
Species the output level of the sound with delay applied.
OFF
Delay
OFF, ON If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
1–1300
Note (*1)
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
T-Ctrl Dly
(Time Control Delay)
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the delay sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Parameter Value Explanation
Feedback
HF Damp
Trm Switch
Trm ModWave
Trm Sync
Trm Hz
Trm Note
Trm Depth
2Tap PanDly
04
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
OFF, ON Switches the tremolo eect on/o
Modulation Wave
TRI Triangle wave
SQR Square wave
SIN Sine wave
SAW1
SAW2
TRP Trapezoidal wave
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note (*1)
0–127 Adjusts the tremolo depth.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Sawtooth wave
If this is “ON,” the tremolo synchronizes with the tempo.
Adjusts the tremolo rate.
(2 Tap Pan Delay)
Delayed sound is heard from the two locations you specify.
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Feedback
HF Damp
Dly1 Pan
Dly2 Pan
Dly1 Level
Dly2 Level
OFF, ON If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
1–1300
Note (*1)
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of delay 1.
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of delay 2.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 1.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 2.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the second delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the delay sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
A stereo delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly.
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Acceleration
Feedback
HF Damp
03
OFF, ON If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
1–1300
Note (*1)
0–15
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
Delay Ó Trem (D
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard.
When you change the delay time, this species the time over which the current delay time changes to the specied delay time. This aects the speed of pitch change as well as the delay time.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect (BYPASS: no cut).
elay Ó Tremolo)
Tremolo is applied to the delay sound.
Parameter Value Explanation
Input
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
MONAURAL The input is mono-mixed.
STEREO The sound is input in stereo.
OFF, ON If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
1–1300
Note (*1)
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard.
05
3Tap PanDly
(3 Tap Pan Delay)
Delayed sound is heard from the three locations you specify.
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Feedback
HF Damp
Dly1 Pan
Dly2 Pan
Dly3 Pan
Dly1 Level
Dly2 Level
Dly3 Level
NOTE
(*1) 1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32., 1/16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4, 1/2T, 1/4.,
1/2, 1T, 1/2., 1, 2T, 1., 2
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,
6300, 8000 [Hz], BYPASS
OFF, ON If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
1–2600
Note (*1)
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of delay 1.
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of delay 2.
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of delay 3.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 1.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 2.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 3.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the third delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the delay sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
7
Page 8
Scene Parameter

SCENE EFFECT: Rev (Reverb)

03
Hall
If the “SYSTEM EFFECT: Rev” (p. 34) Source parameter is set to “SCENE,” the following parameters are shown, allowing you to edit the reverb type and other parameters.
If the parameter is set to “SYS,” the screen indicates “Source is System.,” and the following parameters are not shown.
Parameter Value Explanation
Switch
RevType
Level

Reverb Parameters

OFF, ON Switches the reverb on/o.
Ø“Reverb Parameters” (p. 8)
0–127
Edit the parameters of the selected reverb type. The available parameters dier depending on the type of reverb you selected in ReveType.
Ø“Reverb Parameters” (p. 8)
Species the output level of the sound with reverb applied.
Reverb Parameters
OFF
00
INTEGRA7Rev
01
Parameter Value Explanation
ROOM1, ROOM2,
Char
PreDelay
Time
Density
Diusion
LF Damp
HF Damp
Spread
Tone
02
Parameter Value Explanation
PreDelay
Time
Pre LPF
Pre HPF
PreLpLPF
Diusion
HF Damp F
HF Damp R
HALL1, HALL2, PLATE
0–100
0.1–10.0 [sec] Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
0–127 Adjusts the density of the reverb sound.
0–127
0–100 Adjusts the low-frequency portion of the reverb.
0–100 Adjusts the high-frequency portion of the reverb.
0–127 Adjusts the reverb spread.
0–127 Adjusts the tonal character of the reverb.
Warm Hall
0.0–100.0
0.3–30.0 [sec] Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
20–15000 [Hz], BYPASS (*1)
BYPASS, 16–15000 [Hz] (*2)
20–15000 [Hz], BYPASS (*1)
0–127
1000–8000 [Hz] (*3)
0.1–1.0
(INTEGRA 7 Reverb)
Selects the type of reverb.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard.
Adjusts the change in the density of the reverb over time. The higher the value, the more the density increases with time. The eect of this setting is most pronounced with long reverb times.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard.
Adjusts the frequency above which to cut the high-frequency portion of the sound entering the reverb.
Adjusts the frequency below which to cut the low-frequency portion of the sound entering the reverb.
Adjusts the frequency above which to cut the high-frequency portion of the extended reverberation.
Adjusts the change in the density of the reverb over time.
Adjusts the frequency above which to cut the high-frequency portion of the reverb.
Adjusts the amount by which to attenuate the high-frequency portion of the reverb.
Parameter Value Explanation
PreDelay
Time
Size
High Cut
Density
Diusion
LF Damp F
LF Damp G
HF DampF
HF Damp G
04
Parameter Value Explanation
Char
Pre LPF
Time
Feedback
05
Parameter Value Explanation
Selection
PreDelay
Time
HF Damp
Density
Attack Gain
Attack Time
ER Density
ER Level
Low Freq
Low Gain
Mid Freq
Mid Gain
Mid Q
HighFreq
HighGain
High Q
0.0–100.0
0–127 Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
1–8 Adjusts the size of room/hall.
160–12500 [Hz], BYPASS (*4)
0–127 Adjusts the density of the reverb sound.
0–127
50–4000 [Hz] (*5)
-36–0 [dB]
4000–12500 [Hz] (*6)
-36–0 [dB]
GS Reverb
ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, HALL1, HALL2, PLATE, DELAY, PAN-DELAY
0–7
0–127 Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
0–127
SRV-2000
R0.3, R1.0, R7.0, R15, R22, R26, R32, R37, H15, H22, H26, H32, H37, P-B, P-A
0–160
0.1–99.0 [sec] Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
0.05–1.00 Adjusts the high-frequency portion of the reverb.
0–9 Adjusts the density of the late reverberation.
0–9 Adjusts the gain of the early reections.
0–9 Adjusts the time of the early reections.
0–9 Adjusts the density of the early reections.
0–99 Adjusts the volume of the early reections.
0.04–1.00 [kHz] Species the frequency of the low range.
-24–+12 [dB] Adjusts the gain of the low range.
0.25–9.99 [kHz] Species the frequency of the middle range.
-24–+12 [dB] Adjusts the gain of the middle range.
0.2–9.0
0.80–9.99 [kHz] Species the frequency of the high range.
-24–+12 [dB] Adjusts the gain of the high range.
0.2–9.0
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until
the reverb sound is heard.
Adjusts the frequency above which the
high-frequency portion of the nal output sound
is cut (BYPASS: no cut)
Adjusts how reverb density increases over time.
This eect is especially noticeable with long
reverb times.
Adjusts the frequency below which the
low-frequency portion of the reverb sound is cut.
Adjusts the LF damp attenuation amount (0: no
eect).
Adjusts the frequency above which the
high-frequency portion of the reverb sound is cut.
Adjusts the HF damp attenuation amount (0: no
eect).
Selects the type of reverb.
Adjusts the amount of high-frequency
attenuation for the sound being input to the
reverb.
Adjusts the level at which the reverb sound is
returned to the input.
Selects the type of reverb oered by the Roland
SRV-2000 digital reverb.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until
the reverb sound is heard.
Adjusts the width of the middle range.
Set a higher value to narrow the range to be
aected.
Species the width of the high-frequency range.
Set a higher value to narrow the range to be
aected.
8
Page 9
Scene Parameter
SRV-2000NL
06
Parameter Value Explanation
PreDelay
ReverbTime
GateTime
Low Freq
Low Gain
Mid Freq
Mid Gain
Mid Q
HighFreq
HighGain
Hi Q
07
Parameter Value Explanation
Char
Time
08
0–120
-0.9–+99.0 [sec] Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
10–450
0.04–1.00 [kHz] Species the frequency of the low range.
-24–+12 [dB] Adjusts the gain of the low range.
0.25–9.99 [kHz] Species the frequency of the middle range.
-24–+12 [dB] Adjusts the gain of the middle range.
0.2–9.0
0.80–9.99 [kHz] Species the frequency of the high range.
-24–+12 [dB] Gain of the high range.
0.2–9.0
GM2 Reverb
SMALL ROOM, MEDIUM ROOM, LARGE ROOM, MEDIUM HALL, LARGE HALL, PLATE
0–127 Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
GatedReverb
(NON-LINEAR)
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard.
Adjusts the time from when the reverb starts being heard until the reverb sound is cut o.
Species the width of the middle range. Set a higher value to narrow the range to be aected.
Species the width of the high-frequency range. Set a higher value to narrow the range to be aected.
Selects the type of reverb.

SCENE EFFECT: Cho (Chorus)

If the “SYSTEM EFFECT: Cho” (p. 34) Source parameter is set to “SCENE,” the following parameters are shown, allowing you to edit the chorus type and other parameters.
If the parameter is set to “SYS,” the screen indicates “Source is System.,” and the following parameters are not shown.
Parameter Value Explanation
Switch
ChoType
Level
Rev Send

Chorus Parameters

Chorus Parameters
00
01
This is a stereo chorus.
Parameter Value Explanation
Rate
Depth
Feedback
OFF, ON Switches chorus on/o.
Ø“Chorus Parameters” (p. 9)
0–127
0–127 Species the send level to reverb.
Edit the parameters of the selected chorus. The available parameters dier depending on the type of chorus you selected in ChoType.
Ø“Chorus Parameters” (p. 9)
Species the output level of the sound with
chorus applied.
OFF
Chorus
0–127 Adjusts the frequency of modulation.
0–127 Adjusts the depth of modulation.
0–127
Adjusts the level at which chorus sound is
returned to the input.
Parameter Value Explanation
NORMAL This is a standard gate reverb.
Type
Pre Delay
Gate Time
NOTE
(*1) 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250,
(*2) BYPASS, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800,
(*3) 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
(*4) 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000,
(*5) 50, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
(*6) 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000, 10000, 12500 [Hz]
REVERSE This is a reverb for which the sound ramps up in volume.
SWEEP1 The reverb sound moves from right to left.
SWEEP2 The reverb sound moves from left to right.
0.0–100.0 [ms]
5–500 [ms] Adjusts the decay length of the reverb sound.
1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 15000 [Hz], BYPASS
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 15000 [Hz]
6400, 8000, 10000, 12500 [Hz], BYPASS
2500, 3200, 4000 [Hz]
Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound plays until the reverb sound is heard.
(Chorus)
CE-1
02
This models the classic BOSS CE-1 chorus eect unit. It provides a chorus sound with a distinctively analog warmth.
Parameter Value Explanation
Intensity
03
0–127 Adjusts the chorus depth.
SDD-320
(Dimension D)
This models Roland’s DIMENSION D (SDD-320). It provides a clear chorus sound.
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
04
1, 2, 3, 4, 1+4, 2+4, 3+4
Delay
Switches the mode.
This is a stereo delay.
Parameter Value Explanation
If this is
ON,” the delay synchronizes with the
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Feedback
HF Damp
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note (*1)
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
tempo.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until
the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is
fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will
invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the delay
sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS:
no cut).
9
Page 10
Scene Parameter
05
T-Ctrl Dly
(Time Control Delay)
A stereo delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly.
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Acceleration
Feedback
HF Damp
06
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note (*1)
0–15
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
Delay Ó Trem (D
If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard.
When you change the delay time, this species the time over which the current delay time changes to the specied delay time. This aects the speed of pitch change as well as the delay time.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect (BYPASS: no cut).
elay Ó Tremolo)
Tremolo is applied to the delay sound.
Parameter Value Explanation
Input
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Feedback
HF Damp
Trm Switch
Trm ModWave
Trm Sync
Trm Hz
Trm Note
Trm Depth
07
MONAURAL The input is mono-mixed.
STEREO The sound is input in stereo.
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note (*1)
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
OFF, ON Switches the tremolo eect on/o
Modulation Wave of panning
TRI Triangle wave
SQR Square wave
SIN Sine wave
SAW1
SAW2
TRP Trapezoidal wave
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note (*1)
0–127 Tremolo depth
2Tap PanDly
If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Sawtooth wave
If this is “ON,” the tremolo synchronizes with the tempo.
Tremolo rate
(2 Tap Pan Delay)
08
3Tap PanDly
(3 Tap Pan Delay)
Delayed sound is heard from the three locations you specify.
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Feedback
HF Damp
Dly1 Pan
Dly2 Pan
Dly3 Pan
Dly1 Level
Dly2 Level
Dly3 Level
09
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note (*1)
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of Delay 1.
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of Delay 2.
L64–63R Adjusts the stereo location of Delay 3.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 1.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 2.
0–127 Adjusts the volume of delay 3.
JUNO Chorus
If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the
tempo.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until
the third delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is
fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will
invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the delay
sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS:
no cut).
(JUNO-106 Chorus)
This models the chorus eects of the Roland JUNO-106.
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
Noise Level
10
Parameter Value Explanation
Filter Type
Cuto Freq
Pre Delay
Rate Sync
Rate Hz
Rate Note
Depth
Phase
Feedback
I, II, I+II, JX I, JX II, III, I+III, II+III, I+II+III
0–127 Amount of noise produced by the chorus
JV Chorus
OFF The lter is not used.
LPF This lter cuts o the high frequencies.
HPF This lter cuts o the low frequencies.
200–8000 [Hz]
0.0–100.0 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note (*1)
0–127 Adjusts the depth of modulation.
0–180 [deg] Adjusts the depth of the chorus sound.
0–127
Selects the type of Chorus.
I+II, I+III, II+III, I+II+III: The state in which
multiple buttons are pressed at the same time.
Adjusts the center frequency used when the lter
cuts a specic frequency region.
Adjusts the delay time from when the direct
sound plays until the reverb sound is heard.
When this is ON, the delay synchronizes with the
tempo.
Adjusts the frequency of modulation.
Adjusts how much of the sound that is fed into
the chorus is returned to the input.
Delayed sound is heard from the two locations you specify.
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly Sync
Dly Msec
Dly Note
Feedback
HF Damp
Dly1 Pan
Dly2 Pan
Dly1 Level
Dly2 Level
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note (*1)
-98–+98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], BYPASS (*2)
L64–63R Stereo location of Delay 1
L64–63R Stereo location of Delay 2
0–127 Volume of delay 1
0–127 Volume of delay 2
If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the second delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which the delay sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
10
NOTE
(*1) 1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32., 1/16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4, 1/2T, 1/4.,
1/2, 1T, 1/2., 1, 2T, 1., 2
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,
6300, 8000 [Hz], BYPASS
Page 11
Scene Parameter

SCENE EFFECT: OD (Overdrive)

Parameter Value Explanation
Drive Sw
Drive
Cho Send Lev
Rev Send Lev
Dly Send Lev
OFF, ON Turns overdrive on/o.
0–127 Adjusts the degree of distortion.
Adjusts the amount of chorus.
0–127
If you don’t want to add the chorus eect, set it to “0.”
Adjusts the amount of reverb.
0–127
If you don’t want to add the reverb eect, set it to “0.”
Adjusts the amount of delay.
0–127
If you don’t want to add the delay eect, set it to “0.”

ARP COMMON

Parameter Value Explanation
Species the arpeggio type.
What is changed by TYPE
(1) Arpeggio pattern and part arpeggio parameters of
parts 1–4
(2) Sound (tone) and part level of parts 1–4
* For a part whose SCENE ZONE EDIT > Keyboard Sw
is ON, the current sound (tone) and part level are maintained even if you change the TYPE.
* You can use the SYSTEM > ARPEGGIO > Set Tone
setting to turn on/o the function of (2).
Species the arpeggio’s rhythm type.
What is changed by RHYTHM
(1) Arpeggio pattern and part arpeggio parameters of
part R
(2) Sound (drum kit) and part level of part R
* If the SCENE ZONE EDIT > Keyboard Sw is ON, the
current sound (tone) and part level are maintained even if you change the RHYTHM.
* You can use the SYSTEM > ARPEGGIO > Set Drum Kit
setting to specify whether this changes (ON) or does not change (OFF).
(3) Tempo (SCENE or SYSTEM)
* You can use SYSTEM > ARPEGGIO > Set Tempo to specify
whether this changes (ON) or does not change (OFF).
Species a global duration value that applies a
relative adjustment to the duration values of each
part.
Species the global shue value that applies a
relative adjustment to the shue values of each
part.
Arpeggio switch. This is linked with the panel
button.
Arpeggio hold switch. This is linked with the panel
button.
KEYS switch for the arpeggio PLAY DETECTOR. If
this is “ON,” the arpeggio pitch changes according
to the key you play. This is linked with the panel
button.
BEAT switch for the arpeggio PLAY DETEC TOR.
If this is “ON,” the arpeggio pattern changes
according to the timing of your keyboard
performance. This is linked with the panel button.
Species the BEAT sensitivity of the arpeggio
PLAY DETECTOR. Higher values make the pattern
change more sensitively. If you’re unable to
reproduce the same pattern even when you’re
trying to play the keyboard in the same rhythm,
lowering this value might help.
Species the range of keys detected for arpeggio
performance.
Pressing a key outside the specied range will not
aect the arpeggio function.
Type
Rytm
G-Duration
G-Shue
Switch
Hold Sw
Keys Sw
Beat Sw
Detect Sens
In Range Low In Range Up
00–65
* Refer to “Type/
Rhythm list” (p.
12)
00–65
* Refer to “Type/
Rhythm list” (p.
12)
-50–50
0–100
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
1–10
C- –G9
11
Page 12
Scene Parameter
Type/Rhythm list
Type Rytm
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
OFF OFF
UP 16th KICK
DOWN 16S KICK+HH
UP&DOWN TRI KICK+CLAP
RANDOM 8th LOOP
POLY SYNCP LOOP-S
I-UP 8-16 I-BEAT[2]
I-NO 4-8-16 I-BEAT[3]-1
I-P 4-8-16R I-BEAT[3]-2
I-NO SYNCP I-BEAT[0+3]
I-NO FREE I-BEAT[3]-3
I-ENS P3-1 I-CR78 120
I-ENS P3-2 I-CR78 116
I-ENS P3-3S I-CR78 112S
I-ENS P34-1 I-90’s 70
I-ENS P34-2 I-T808 120
I-ENS P34-3 I-T909 120
I-ENS P34-4 I-T808 120
I-ENS P34-5 I-T909 135
I-ENS P34-6 I-POP 80
I-ENS P34-7 I-T808 80
I-ENS P34-8 I-T808 131
I-ENS P34-9 I-CR78 112S
I-ENSP34-10 I-T707 124
I-ENSP34-11 I-ANA 122
I-ENSP34-12 I-CR78 109
I-ENSP34-13 I-T909 135S
I-ENSP34-14 I-CR78 118
I-ENSP34-15 I-ANA 118
I-ENSP34-16 I-T606 112
I-ENSP34-17 I-T808 149
I-ENSP34-18 I-CR78 124
I-ENSP34-19 I-T909 126
I-ENSP34-20 I-CR78 98S
I-ENSP34-21 I-STD 116S
I-ENSP34-22 I-T808 130
I-ENSP34-23 I-T606 135
I-ENSP34-24 I-CR78 160
I-ENSP34-25 I-ANA 130
I-ENSP34-26 I-CR78 152
I-ENSP34-27 I-T808 138
I-ENSP234-1 I-T808 108
I-ENSP234-2 I-CR78 98
I-ENSP234-3 I-T808 114S
I-ENSP234-4 I-T606 126S
I-ENSP34-28 I-HOUSE 120
I-ENSP34-29 I-HIPHOP109
I-ENSP234-5 I-T808 105
I-ENSP234-6 I-JAZZ 110
I-ENSP234-7 I-POWER 112
I-ENSP34-30 I-T909 125
I-DLY SYNTH I-HIPHOP142
I-DLY PIANO I-T707 123
I-DLY PLUCK I-T808 120
I-BASS AUTO I-T909 118
I-BASS DOWN I-D&B 140
I-ENSP34-31 I-T626 98
I-ENSP34-32 I-80’S 95
I-ENSP34-33 I-T909 110
I-ENSP34-34 I-T808 172
60
61
62
63
64
65
Type Rytm
I-ENSP34-35 I-T7&7 175
I-ENSP34-36 I-EDM 95
I-ENSP34-37 I-CR78 88
I-ENSP34-38 I-T7&7 96
I-ENSP34-39 I-T909 108
I-ENSP34-40 I-T626 105
12
Page 13

ARP PART

Parameter I-ARP ARP STEP Value Explanation
Switch
Arp Mode
(*1)
I-ARP Style
* Refer to “Style List”
(p. 14)
(*2)
ARP Style
* Refer to “Style List”
(p. 14)
(*2)
Variation
Arp Step Sw
Step Key Shift
Motif
Oct Range
Duration
(*2)
(*3)
(*4)
(*4)
Grid
Grid Length (*5
Grid Note
(*1)
Grid Oset
(*1)
Grid Sync
Probability
Style
* Refer to “Style List”
(p. 14)
Amount Auto
Amount
Amount Dir
Velo Amount
Grid Oset
Setting
Key Sw Sync
Hold Sw
Transpose
(*)
Velocity
Oset Velo
Shue Rate
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ
-
-
-
- -
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ µ
)
µ
µ µ µ
µ
µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
- - 000–111
µ
µ
µ
-
- - -63–+64 Species the grid position at which the arpeggio pattern starts as an amount of shift from the rst grid position.
- - OFF, ON Turn this ON if you want the arpeggio sounded for each part to be synchronized with the grid.
OFF, ON Species whether each part’s arpeggio is “ON” or “OFF” when the panel arpeggio switch is ON.
Sets how the arpeggio operates for each part.
I-ARP, ARP, STEP
- 1–128 Sets the arpeggio style.
- 1–11 Sets the arpeggio style variation. The number of available variations depends on the style.
- OFF, ON Plays the arpeggio using the pattern data you created with Step Edit.
OFF, ON The pattern data created in Step Edit is played, transposed according to the notes played on the keyboard.
µ
Species the order in which the notes of the chord you play are sounded as an arpeggio.
UP
DOWN
UP&DOWN
RANDOM
­NOTE ORDER
RHYTHM
PHRASE
AUTO
- -3–+3
0–100 [%]
2–64 Species the grid length for the arpeggio pattern.
µ
Species the note value represented by one grid of the arpeggio.
4th
8th
8th_3
16th
16th_3
32nd
OFF, 1–64 Sets an arpeggio pattern with a specied probability of playing back note messages.
OFF, ON
0–100% Sets the degree of playback probability.
Standard, Reverse Reverses the degree of change for the Probability Amount.
0–100%
-63–+64 Sets the start position of the pattern that’s set in Probability Style, by using the shift amount from the start grid.
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
-36–+36 Shifts the arpeggio notes in semitone steps.
REAL,
­1–127
-127–+127 Shifts the velocity values. Use this if the velocity values are not an appropriate match with other parts.
0–100 [%]
I-ARP: Analyzes your keyboard performance and plays the arpeggio pattern that best matches it. ARP: Plays a simple arpeggio pattern. STEP: Plays the pattern data you created using the STEP EDIT function. Use this setting when you want to play
original arpeggio phrases.
Sets the style for the I-ARPEGGIO. You can select the ARP COMMON type for each part.
Sounded consecutively starting at the lowest key you press.
Sounded consecutively starting at the highest key you press.
Sounded consecutively from the lowest to the highest key, and then back down to the lowest.
The keys you press are sounded in random order.
Sounded in the order in which you press the keys.
Notes are sounded as specied by the arpeggio pattern, regardless of the pitches that you play on the keyboard. This is useful when playing a rhythm pattern.
The pitches specied by the arpeggio pattern are played, but shifted according to the pitches that you play. This is useful when you want to transpose the melody while the arpeggio plays.
When you play a chord, priority is given to starting with the lowest pitch. This is eective for a bass part.
Species the range of octaves in which the arpeggio is sounded. You can specify whether the arpeggio is sounded in the octave(s) above (+) or below (-) the notes you play.
Species the duration that the notes of the arpeggio pattern are sounded, as a proportion of the note length. You can set this to make the arpeggiated notes sound briey for a staccato feel, or at their full duration for a tenuto feel.
quarter note (1 grid = 1 beat)
eighth note (2 grids = 1 beat)
eighth note triplet (3 grids = 1 beat)
sixteenth note (4 grids = 1 beat)
sixteenth note triplets (6 grids = 1 beat)
thirty-second note (8 grids = 1 beat)
When this is set to “ON,” your keyboard performance is analyzed and the degree of playback probability is changed automatically.
Sets the volume of notes that play back based on the Probability Style. Smaller values produce lower playback volumes, and the maximum value produces the normal volume.
When this is “ON,” you can turn the arpeggio for the relevant parts on/o in part select mode by using the panel button [9]–[13] keyboard switches.
When the panel’s arpeggio hold switch is ON, this setting species whether the arpeggio performance of each part is held when you release the keyboard (ON) or stops when you release the keyboard (OFF).
Species the velocity of the arpeggiated notes. If you want the velocity to vary according to the strength at which you actually press the key, choose (REAL). If you want the velocity to be a xed value regardless of your actual playing dynamics, specify that value (1–127).
Varies the timing of even-numbered beats, creating a shue rhythm. A setting of “50%” sounds the notes at equal timing, and increasing this value produces more of a dotted shue feel.
Scene Parameter
13
Page 14
Scene Parameter
Parameter I-ARP ARP STEP Value Explanation
Species the note resolution that is the reference for the shue setting.
Shue Reso
Timing
(*5)
Note O
Poly Remain
K-Range Lo
K-Range Oct
(*1)
Reset Oct
Duck Part
Duck Note
Duck Rate
(*4)
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ
-
µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ
- - OFF, ON
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
µ µ µ
16TH Sixteen note
8TH Eighth note
Species the timing at which the arpeggio pattern changes when the PLAY DETECTOR setting BEAT is ON.
IMMEDIATE Change immediately.
BEAT Change at the beginning of the beat.
MEAS Change at the beginning of the measure.
END Change at the beginning of the arpeggio pattern cycle.
Species when previously-sounded notes are turned o if the arpeggio pattern changes.
NORMAL Sound the note length specied by the arpeggio pattern, and then turn the note o.
µ
IMMEDIATE Turn o immediately.
If this is other than “OFF,” the following two behaviors will be dierent than normal.
-
OFF, 1–127
C -–G 9
OFF, 0–12
OFF, PART 1–PART 4, PART R
Any, C -–G 9
0–100
Even if the arpeggio pattern is mono, chords played on the keyboard are limited to the specied number of notes. Even if you do not play legato, the individual notes that you play up to the specied number are remembered, and reected by the arpeggio performance. This produces a result that feels more like keyboard playing than a conventional arpeggio performance.
Species the lower pitch limit that is sounded by the arpeggio. If the arpeggio attempts to play a note that is lower than this, the octave is raised.
Species the number of higher octaves in which the arpeggio is sounded, relative to K-Range Lo. If the arpeggio attempts to play a note that is higher than this range, the octave is lowered.
If this is “ON,” when the arpeggio returns to the start grid, it plays from the octave that you pressed, regardless of the Oct Range setting.
Velocity duck This temporarily lowers the velocity of a specic note of a specic part when an arpeggio note coincides at the same timing. You can use this to prevent the volume from being excessive when notes overlap, or in a way similar to how a side-chain compressor eect can lower the volume of other instruments at the timing of the kick drum, so that a sense of musical groove is created.
Duck Part: Enter the part to which the eect applies. For example, to specify the rhythm part, set this to “PART R.” If
Duck Note: Species the note of the Duck Part sound that is the target. For example, if you want to target the kick
Duck Rate: Species the proportion by which Velocity Duck lowers the velocity value. Higher values produce a
this is “OFF,” velocity duck does not occur.
drum, specify “C2.” If you specify “Any,” all notes of that part are the target.
greater ducking eect, so that with a setting of “100” there will be no sound at that timing (maximum velocity duck eect). With a setting of “0” there will be no velocity ducking.
(*1)
This is shown only if Arp Mode is set to “I-ARP.”
(*2)
This is shown only if Arp Mode is set to “ARP.”
(*3)
This is shown only if Arp Mode is set to “STEP.”
(*4)
This is shown only if Arp Mode is set to “I-ARP” and “ARP.”
(*5)
This is shown only if Arp Mode is set to “I-ARP” and “STEP.”
Style List
I-ARP Style ARP Style Probability Style
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
CURRENT TYPE - -
TYPE1 PART1 SIMPLE EIGHT1
TYPE5 PART1 1/8BASIC1 EIGHT2
TYPE6 PART1 1/8BASIC2 QUARTER1
TYPE7 PART1 1/8BASIC3 QUARTER2
TYPE8 PART1 1/8BASIC4 HALF1
TYPE9 PART1 1/8BASIC5 HALF2
TYPE10 PART1 1/8SYNC11 HALF3
TYPE11 PART3 1/8SYNC12 HALF4
TYPE11 PART4 1/8SYNC13 HALF5
TYPE12 PART3 1/8SYNC14 SHORT1
TYPE12 PART4 1/8SYNC15 SHORT2
TYPE13 PART3 1/8SYNC21 SHORT3
TYPE13 PART4 1/8SYNC22 DOUBLE
TYPE14 PART3 1/8SYNC23 1MEAS1
TYPE14 PART4 1/8SYNC24 1MEAS2
TYPE15 PART3 1/8SYNC25 1MEAS3
TYPE15 PART4 1/8DRIVE1 1MEAS4
TYPE16 PART3 1/8DRIVE2 1MEAS5
TYPE16 PART4 1/8DRIVE3 1MEAS6
TYPE17 PART3 1/8DRIVE4 1MEAS7
TYPE17 PART4 1/8DRIVE5 1MEAS8
TYPE18 PART3 1/8VARI1 1MEAS9
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
I-ARP Style ARP Style Probability Style
TYPE18 PART4 1/8VARI2 1MEAS10
TYPE19 PART3 1/8VARI3 1MEAS11
TYPE19 PART4 1/8VARI4 1MEAS12
TYPE20 PART3 1/8VARI5 1MEAS13
TYPE20 PART4 1/16BASC1 1MEAS14
TYPE21 PART3 1/16BASC2 1MEAS15
TYPE22 PART3 1/16BASC3 1MEAS16
TYPE22 PART4 1/16BASC4 1MEAS17
TYPE23 PART3 1/16BASC5 1MEAS18
TYPE23 PART4 1/16SYN11 1MEAS19
TYPE24 PART3 1/16SYN12 1MEAS20
TYPE24 PART4 1/16SYN13 2MEAS1
TYPE25 PART3 1/16SYN14 2MEAS2
TYPE25 PART4 1/16SYN15 2MEAS3
TYPE26 PART3 1/16SYN21 2MEAS4
TYPE26 PART4 1/16SYN22 2MEAS5
TYPE27 PART3 1/16SYN23 2MEAS6
TYPE27 PART4 1/16SYN24 2MEAS7
TYPE28 PART3 1/16SYN25 2MEAS8
TYPE28 PART4 1/16DRVE1 2MEAS9
TYPE29 PART3 1/16DRVE2 2MEAS10
TYPE29 PART4 1/16DRVE3 2MEAS11
TYPE30 PART3 1/16DRVE4 2MEAS12
14
Page 15
Scene Parameter
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
I-ARP Style ARP Style Probability Style
TYPE30 PART4 1/16DRVE5 2MEAS13
TYPE31 PART3 RHYTHM X1 2MEAS14
TYPE31 PART4 RHYTHM X2 2MEAS15
TYPE32 PART3 RHYTHM X3 2MEAS16
TYPE32 PART4 RHYTHM X4 2MEAS17
TYPE33 PART3 RHYTHM X5 2MEAS18
TYPE33 PART4 RHYTHM X6 2MEAS19
TYPE34 PART3 RHYTHM X7 FEW1
TYPE34 PART4 RHYTHM X8 FEW2
TYPE35 PART3 CYCLES3RD FE W3
TYPE35 PART4 CYCLES4TH FEW4
TYPE36 PART3 CYCLES5TH FEW5
TYPE36 PART4 CYCLESMAJ FEW6
TYPE37 PART3 CYCLESMIN VARI1
TYPE37 PART4 CYCMAJ/MN VARI2
TYPE38 PART3 AG PROGR1 VARI3
TYPE38 PART4 AG PROGR2 VARI4
TYPE39 PART3 AG CUTTIN VARI5
TYPE39 PART4 AG 3FINGR VARI6
TYPE40 PART3 AG ARPEGG
TYPE40 PART4 AG SPANS1
TYPE41 PART2 AG SPANS2
TYPE41 PART3 AG RIFFS
TYPE41 PART4 EG CUTTIN
TYPE42 PART2 EG RIFFS
TYPE42 PART3 EG ODRIF1
TYPE42 PART4 EG ODRIF2
TYPE43 PART2 EG ARPEGG
TYPE43 PART3 BLUES GTR
TYPE43 PART4 GTR TRILL
TYPE44 PART4 BASS PHR
TYPE45 PART3 BS SHUFFL
TYPE45 PART4 FRETLESBS
TYPE46 PART3 WALKINGBS
TYPE46 PART4 BALLADBAS
TYPE47 PART2 EP PROGR1
TYPE47 PART3 EP PROGR2
TYPE47 PART4 LTN PIANO
TYPE48 PART2 FUNKCLAV1
TYPE48 PART3 FUNKCLAV2
TYPE48 PART4 SYNTHLEAD
TYPE49 PART2 DANCE SYN
TYPE49 PART3 HARP  
TYPE49 PART4 SYN BASS1
TYPE50 PART3 SYN BASS2
TYPE50 PART4 SYN BASS3
TYPE56 PART3 SYN LINE1
TYPE56 PART4 SYN LINE2
TYPE57 PART3 SYN LINE3
TYPE57 PART4 LEADLINE1
TYPE58 PART3 LEADLINE2
TYPE58 PART4 LEADLINE3
TYPE59 PART3 SEQUENCE1
TYPE59 PART4 SEQUENCE2
TYPE60 PART3 SEQUENCE3
TYPE60 PART4 CHORDS 1
TYPE61 PART3 CHORDS 2
TYPE61 PART4 CHORDS 3
TYPE62 PART3 SHORTIES1
TYPE62 PART4 SHORTIES2
TYPE63 PART3 SHORTIES3
TYPE63 PART4 FATTIES 1
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
I-ARP Style ARP Style Probability Style
TYPE64 PART3 FATTIES 2
TYPE64 PART4 FATTIES 3
TYPE65 PART3 SHRT&FAT1
TYPE65 PART4 SHRT&FAT2
FAT&SHRT1
FAT&SHRT2
MIXTURE 1
MIXTURE 2
MIXTURE 3
COMBINAT1
COMBINAT2
COMBINAT3
COMBINAT4
COMBINAT5
COMBINAT6
COMBINAT7
COMBINAT8
PLEXI 1 
PLEXI 2 
PLEXI 3 
PLEXI 4 
15
Page 16
1
2
3
OFF
2
1
OFF
3
High note range
Pitch dierence from
equal temperament
Parameter
value
Low note range

Tone Parameters

There are no displayed parameters.
There are no displayed parameters.

TONE COMMON Parameters

* You can set whether control change messages (CC) are transmitted/received
using the “Tone CC Map” system parameter (p. 32).
TONE COMMON
JUNO-X, JUNO-106, JUNO-106
Parameter Value Explanation
(name)
Catg
TONE COMMON
VOCODER
TONE COMMON
PR-A DRUM, CMN DRUM
TONE COMMON
XV-5080, RD-PIANO, PR-A, PR-B, PD-C, PR-D, COMMON, PR-X
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
(name)
Catg
Level
Pan
Priority
Coarse Tune
Fine Tune
Octave
Tone name
CATEGORY Selects the tone’s category.
Tone name
CATEGORY Selects the tone’s categor y.
0–127
L64–63R
This determines how notes will be managed when the maximum polyphony is exceeded.
LAST
LOUDEST
-48–+48
-50–+50
-3–+3
Adjusts the overall volume of the tone.
Species the pan of the tone. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and “63R” is far right.
The last-played voices will be given priority, and currently sounding notes will be turned o in order, beginning with the rst-played note.
The voices with the loudest volume will be given priority, and currently sounding notes will be turned o, beginning with the lowest-volume voice.
Adjusts the pitch of the sound up or down in semitone steps (+/-4 octaves).
Adjusts the pitch of the sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/-50 cents).
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in units of an octave (+/-3 octaves).
110
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
This setting allows you to apply “stretched tuning” to the tone. (Stretched tuning is a system by which acoustic pianos are normally tuned, causing the lower range to be lower and the higher range to be higher than the mathematical tuning ratios would otherwise dictate.) With a setting of “OFF,” the tone’s tuning will be equal temperament. A setting of “3” will produce the greatest dierence in the pitch of the low and high ranges. The diagram shows the pitch change relative to equal temperament that will occur in the low and high ranges. This setting will have a subtle eect on the way in which chords resonate.
Applies time-varying change to the pitch and volume of the tone that is producing sound, adding a sense of variability. As you increase this value toward the maximum, the variability becomes greater, producing instability.
This is eective when MONO/POLY is set to MONO and Legato Switch is turned “ON.” When you press the next key while still holding down the previous key (legato performance), the pitch changes smoothly. The way in which the change occurs depends on the Legato Retrigger Interval.
When Legato Switch is enabled and you play legato, this species whether retriggering occurs (0–12) or does not occur (OFF). If this is “OFF,” only the pitch of the currently­sounding tones changes according to the pitch of the key. If this is set to 1–12, retriggering occurs smoothly when the pitch dierence during legato performance exceeds the specied value.
If this is set to “4”
Using C4 as the reference pitch, playing notes Db4–E4 legato will change only the pitch without retriggering, but playing the F4 note (which is ve semitones away from C4) legato will retrigger F4. When F4 is retriggered at this time, F4 now becomes the reference pitch.
If this is set to “0”
Each note is retriggered every time regardless of the pitch dierence. For acoustic-type sounds in particular, an unnatural impression can occur if only the pitch is changed, so you’ll need to adjust the Legato Retrigger Interval.
Species whether the portamento eect will be applied (ON) or not applied (OFF).
* Portamento is an eect which smoothly changes the
pitch from the rst-played key to the next-played key. By applying portamento when the MONO/ POLY parameter is “MONO,” you can simulate slide performance techniques on a violin or similar instrument.
Applies portamento only when you play legato (i.e., when you press the next key before releasing the previous key).
115
116
Stretch
Analog Feel
Mono Poly
Legato Sw
Retrig Intvl
(Legato Retrigger Interval)
Porta Sw
Porta Mode
OFF, 1–3
0–127
Species whether the tone will play polyphonically (POLY) or monophonically (MONO).
MONO Sound only the last-played key one at a time.
POLY Two or more notes can be played simultaneously.
OFF, ON
0–12, OFF
OFF, ON
Species the performance conditions for which portamento will be applied.
NORMAL Portamento will always be applied.
LEGATO
16
Page 17
Tone Parameters
C5
D4
C4
press D4 key
Pitch
Time
press C4 key
press C5 key
C5
D4
C4
press D4 key
Pitch
Time
press C4 key
press C5 key
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
Species the type of portamento eect.
Porta Type
RAT E
The time it takes will depend on the distance between the two pitches.
TIME The time it takes will be constant.
When another key is pressed during a pitch change produced by portamento, a new pitch change will begin. This setting species the pitch at which the change will begin.
Starts a new portamento when another key is pressed while the pitch is changing.
PITCH
Porta Start
Portamento will begin from the pitch where the current change would end.
NOTE
When portamento is used, this species the time
Porta Time
0–1023
over which the pitch will change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to
5
take more time.
Species the pitch change curve for portamento.
Porta Crv
LIN Change on a linear curve.
EXP-L Change on a non-linear curve (gentle slope).
EXP-H Change on a non-linear curve (steep slope).
Species the amount of change in semitone units when the pitch bend wheel is turned all the way
BendRange Up
0–48
upward. For example, if this is “48,” turning the pitch bend wheel all the way upward raises the pitch by four
41
octaves.
Species the amount of change in semitone units when the pitch bend wheel is turned all the way
BendRange Dw
0–48
downward. For example, if this is “48,” turning the pitch bend wheel all the way downward lowers the pitch by
49
four octaves.
NORMAL The pitch bend wheel produces the usual eect.
The pitch bend eect applies only to the
BendMode
CATCH+LAST
last-played note. If a note-on occurs while pitch bend is already applied, the new note sounds at the center pitch. The pitch starts changing only after the controller passes through the center position.
Species the amount of volume change that
Soft Lv Sens
0–100
occurs when you operate the soft pedal (CC#67). This is eective when specied for piano sounds.
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
Tone PMT
Species how partials are played according to your keyboard playing dynamics (velocity). If this is “ON,” dierent partials are sounded according to the playing velocity and the Velo Rng Low/Upp and Velo FadeLow/Upp settings.
¹If this is “RANDOM” or “CYCLE,” each partial is
sounded randomly or cyclically.
¹In the case of “RANDOM” or “CYCLE” when
Structure 1-2 (3-4) has a setting other than OFF, partials 1 and 2 (3 and 4) are sounded as a
Vel Ctrl
OFF, ON, RANDOM, CYCLE
pair, either randomly or in alternation.
¹In the case of “RANDOM” or “CYCLE,” velocity
has no eect, but you’ll need to make settings for each partial so that the Velocity Range does not conict.
EXP
Level Crv
LINEAR
When using Vel Ctrl to switch between partials, the crossfade level changes in a non-linear curve.
When using Vel Ctrl to switch between partials, the crossfade level changes in a linear curve.
Synth
This layers a single sound. If the Unison Switch is on, the number of notes layered on one key will change according to the number of keys you play.
Unison Sw
Unison Size
Unison Detn
BendRngFine Up
BendRngFine Dw
OFF, ON
2–8
0–100
0–100
0–100
¹If the OSC Type is PCM, this is limited to mono
playing.
¹If the Legato Sw is on, the Delay Time is
ignored while playing legato.
¹Even if Retrig Intvl (Legato Retrigger Interval)
is specied, it operates as OFF.
If unison is on, this species the number of notes that are assigned to each key that is pressed. Increasing the Unison Size increases the polyphony, making it more likely that notes will be cut o.
Detunes each of the notes that are allocated by the Unison Size number, producing a detuned eect. As you increase this value, each note is detuned more greatly, producing a thicker sound.
Species a ne adjustment in one-cent units to the amount of change when the pitch bend wheel is turned upward.
Species a ne adjustment in one-cent units to the amount of change when the pitch bend wheel is turned downward.
119
17
Page 18

Tone Parameters

Parameter Value Explanation CC#
Synth PMT
The sound of partial 1 is modulated by partial 2.
OFF OFF
Implements the oscillator sync function that is provided by an analog synthesizer. The partial 1 oscillator is reset at intervals of partial 2’s pitch cycle.
* This is eective only if OSC Type is “ VA” or “PCM-Sync.”
Implements the ring modulator function that is provided by an analog synthesizer. The output sound of partial 2 is multiplied with partial 1.
Implements the cross modulation function that is provided by an analog synthesizer. The output sound of partial 2 is applied as the pitch of partial 1.
* XMOD2 is available only when Partial 1 and 3 are OSC
Type “VA.”
Implements the oscillator sync function that is provided by an analog synthesizer. The partial 3 oscillator is reset at intervals of partial 4’s pitch cycle.
* This is eective only if OSC Type is “ VA” or “PCM-Sync.”
Implements the ring modulator function that is provided by an analog synthesizer. The output sound of partial 4 is multiplied with partial 3.
Implements the cross modulation function that is provided by an analog synthesizer. The output sound of partial 4 is applied as the pitch of partial 3.
* XMOD2 is available only when Partial 1 and 3 are OSC
Type “VA.”
Sets the partial 1 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure1-2 is RING.
Sets the partial 2 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure1-2 is RING.
Sets the partial 3 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure3-4 is RING.
Sets the partial 4 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure3-4 is RING.
Cross Modulation Depth when Structure1-2 is XMOD.
Cross Modulation Depth when Structure3-4 is XMOD.
Sets the partial 1 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure1-2 is XMOD/XMOD2.
Sets the partial 2 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure1-2 is XMOD/XMOD2.
Sets the partial 3 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure3-4 is XMOD/XMOD2.
Sets the partial 4 OSC level.
* It is eective when Structure3-4 is XMOD/XMOD2.
This is available if OSC Type is “VA”; it locks the waveform phase between partials.
* It is eective to use this with XMOD2.
Cross Modulation Depth when Structure1-2 is XMOD2.
Cross Modulation Depth when Structure3-4 is XMOD2.
Struct12
Struct34
Ring12 Level
Ring34 Level
Ring OSC1 Lv
Ring OSC2 Lv
Ring OSC3 Lv
Ring OSC4 Lv
XMd12 Dpth
XMd34 Dpth
XMd OSC1 Lv
XMd OSC2 Lv
XMd OSC3 Lv
XMd OSC4 Lv
Ptl Phs Lock
XMd2 12 Dpth
XMd2 34 Dpth
SYNC
RING
XMOD, XMOD2
The sound of partial 3 is modulated by partial 4.
OFF OFF
SYNC
RING
XMOD, XMOD2
0–127 RING level when Structure1-2 is RING.
0–127 RING level when Structure3-4 is RING.
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–10800
0–10800
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
0–127
0–127
TONE Parameters
TONE
JUNO-X
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
LFO WAVEFORM
LFO NOTE
LFO RATE
LFO DELAY TIME
LFO SYNC
OSC LFO MOD
FILTER MOD
AMP MOD
SUPER SAW
PW MODE
PULSE WIDTH MOD / SSAW DETUNE
SUB OSC PSHIFT
OSC PITCH
SIN, SAW-DW, SQR, S&H
1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32., 1/16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4, 1/2T, 1/4., 1/2, 1T, 1/2., 1, 2T, 1., 2, 4
0–1023 Species the rate of the LFO cycle. 29
0–1023
OFF, ON
0–100 Uses the LFO to vary the pitch (vibrato). 26
0–100
0–100
OFF, ON
Species the pulse width mode.
If SUPER SAW = OFF:
LFO The pulse width is aected by the LFO.
MANUAL
ENV The pulse width is aected by ENV.
If SUPER SAW = ON:
LFO
MANUAL
ENV
0–127
OFF, ON
-12–+12
Selects the waveform of the LFO. 35
Sets the LFO RATE as a note length, when LFO SYNC is “ON.”
Adjusts the time from when a key is pressed until LFO modulation starts being applied.
Turn this ON to sync the speed of the LFO cycle with the tempo.
Adjusts the amount by which the LFO modulates the cuto frequency.
Sets how much the LFO changes the AMP volume.
Set this to “ON” to use the Super SAW wave instead of the pulse wave.
The pulse width is aected by PULSE WIDTH MOD.
Changes the Super SAW Detune depth based on the LFO.
Sets the Super SAW Detune depth based on PULSE WIDTH MOD.
Sets the Super SAW Detune depth based on the ENV.
If SUPER SAW = OFF:
PW MODE = LFO:
PW MODE = MANUAL:
PW MODE = ENV:
If SUPER SAW = ON:
PW MODE = LFO:
PW MODE = MANUAL:
PW MODE = ENV:
Sets whether to use the settings of the JUNO-106 (OFF) or the JUNO-60 (ON) for the phase setting between the sub-oscillator pulse wave and sawtooth wave.
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator in semitones.
Adjusts the degree of pulse width change based on the LFO.
Adjusts the pulse width value.
Adjusts the degree of pulse width change based on the ENV.
Adjusts the degree of Super SAW Detune change based on the LFO.
Adjusts the Super SAW Detune depth.
Adjusts the degree of Super SAW Detune change based on the ENV.
31
27
117
28
30
46
50
25
20
18
Page 19
Tone Parameters
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
Shifts the tuning of the sawtooth wave and sub-oscillator to create a detuned eect. Larger values detune the oscillators more, making the sound thicker.
OSC DETUNE
OSC PAN SPLIT
PW LEVEL / SSAW LEVEL
SAW LEVEL
SUB LEVEL
NOISE LEVEL
HPF-STEP
VINTAGE FLT T YPE
CUTOFF
RESONANCE
FLT ENV DEPTH
FLT KEY FOLLOW
FLT VSENS
AMP LEVEL
AMP ENV SEL
AMP VSENS
PENV ATTACK
PENV DECAY
PENV SUSTAIN
PENV RELEASE
PENV VSENS
PENV DEPTH
ENV ATTACK
ENV DECAY
ENV SUSTAIN
ENV RELEASE
BEND FILTER
BEND PITCH
MODULATION LFO
PORTA MODE
PORTA TIME
-50–+50
-50–+50
0–255 Adjusts the pulse wave/Super SAW volume. 16
0–255 Adjusts the volume of the sawtooth wave. 17
0–255 Adjusts the volume of the sub oscillator. 18
0–255 Adjusts the noise volume. 19
0–3
R, M, S
0–1023
0–1023
-1023–+1023
-200–200
-100–+100
0–127 Adjusts the volume of the tone. 110
ENV F&A, G-AMP
-100–+100
0–1023
0–1023
0–1023
0–1023
-100–+100
-100–+100
0–1023 Species the ENV Attack time. 89
0–1023 Species the ENV Decay time. 90
0–1023 Species the ENV Sustain level. 102
0–1023 Species the ENV Release time. 103
-63–+63
0–1200
-63–+63
OFF, ON
0–1023
Setting this to a positive value raises the pitch of the sawtooth wave while lowering the pitch of the sub-oscillator. Setting this to a negative value lowers the pitch of the sawtooth wave while raising the pitch of the sub-oscillator.
Sets the degree of separation for the panning of the pulse wave/Super SAW, sawtooth wave, sub-oscillator and noise.
Sets the high-pass lter’s cuto frequency in four steps.
Selects one of three response curves, each modeling the LPF of an analog synthesizer of the past.
Species the cuto frequency of the low-pass lter. The frequency region above the cuto frequency is cut, producing a more mellow tonal character.
Boosts the region of the lter’s cuto frequency. Higher values produce a stronger result, giving the sound a distinctively synthesizer-like character.
Adjusts the amount by which the cuto frequency is controlled by the envelope.
Adjusts the amount by which the keyboard pitch aects the cuto frequency (key follow). With smaller values, the cuto frequency becomes lower as you play higher notes.
Adjusts how much the cuto frequency changes according to how hard you play the keys.
Species whether the volume is controlled by the ENV (ENV F&A) or by the gate signal (G-AMP).
Adjusts how much the AMP volume changes according to how hard you play the keys.
Species the attack time of the pitch envelope.
Species the decay time of the pitch envelope.
Species the sustain level of the pitch envelope.
Species the release time of the pitch envelope.
Adjusts the pitch envelope depth according to how hard you play the keys.
Species the depth of the pitch envelope.
Species the range of lter change produced by pitch bend.
Species the range of pitch change produced by pitch bend.
Species the amount of LFO applied by modulation.
Turns portamento on/o. If this is “ON,” the pitch will change smoothly from one note to the next-played note.
Adjusts the time over which the portamento pitch change occurs.
21
55
79
108
3
9
81
122
53
54
83
80
85
86
52
22
14
41
118
5
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
Species the pitch change curve for portamento.
Change according to the original curve of the model.
Sets how much aftertouch changes the LFO intensity.
* This is only enabled for products with
aftertouch.
Sets how much aftertouch changes the low-pass lter intensity.
* This is only enabled for keyboards with
aftertouch.
Sets how much aftertouch changes the tone volume.
* This is only enabled for keyboards with
aftertouch.
Adjusts the slight pitch drift that occurs when notes are played on an analog synthesizer.
Simulates the changes that occur as a unit ages.
When this is set to “ON,” the LFO RATE, CUTOFF and RESONANCE produce greater change.
119
PORTA CRV
KEY MODE
AFT LFO
AFT FREQ
AFT LEVEL
PITCH DRIFT
CONDITION
PARAM EXPANSION
ORIGINAL
LINEAR Change in a linear curve.
EXP1 Change in a non-linear curve (gentle slope).
EXP2 Change in a non-linear curve (steep slope).
Species how notes are sounded.
POLY Polyphonic
SOLO Monophonic
UNISON Unison
SL-UNISON Monophonic unison
-63–+63
-63–+63
-63–+63
0–255
0–100
OFF, ON
19
Page 20
Tone Parameters
TONE
JUNO-106
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
LFO RATE
LFO DELAY TIME
OSC RANGE
OSC LFO MOD
PULSE WIDTH MOD
PW MODE
PW SWITCH
SAW SWITCH
SUB LEVEL
NOISE LEVEL
HPF-STEP
VINTAGE FLT T YPE
CUTOFF
RESONANCE
FLT ENV DEPTH
FILTER MOD
FLT KEY FOLLOW
AMP ENV SEL
AMP LEVEL
ENV ATTACK
ENV DECAY
ENV SUSTAIN
ENV RELEASE
BEND PITCH
BEND FILTER
MODULATION LFO
PORTA MODE
PORTA TIME
PORTA CRV
0–1023 Species the speed of the LFO cycle. 29
0–1023
16’, 8’, 4’ Species the octave of the oscillator.
0–100 Uses the LFO to vary the pitch (vibrato). 26
0–127
LFO, MANUAL
OFF, ON Turns the pulse wave on/o.
OFF, ON Turns the sawtooth wave on/o.
0–255 Adjusts the volume of the sub oscillator. 18
0–255 Adjusts the volume of the noise. 19
0–3
R, M, S
0–1023
0–1023
-1023–+1023
0 - 100
0 - 200
ENV F&A, G-AMP
0–127 Adjusts the volume of the tone. 110
0–1023 Species the ENV Attack time. 89
0–1023 Species the ENV Decay time. 90
0–1023 Species the ENV Sustain level. 102
0–1023 Species the ENV Release time. 103
0–1200
0–63
0–63
OFF, ON
0–1023
Species the pitch change curve for portamento.
ORIGINAL
LINEAR Change in a linear curve.
EXP1 Change in a non-linear cur ve (gentle slope).
EXP2 Change in a non-linear cur ve (steep slope).
Adjusts the time from when the key is pressed until LFO modulation starts to apply.
PM MODE = LFO:
PM MODE = MANUAL:
Selects whether the pulse width is modulated by the LFO (LFO) or kept at the xed value specied by PULSE WIDTH MOD (MANUAL).
Sets the high-pass lter’s cuto frequency in four steps.
Selects one of three response curves, each modeling the LPF of an analog synthesizer of the past.
Species the cuto frequency of the low-pass lter. The frequency region above the cuto frequency is cut, producing a more mellow tonal character.
Boosts the region of the lter’s cuto frequency. Higher values produce a stronger result, giving the sound a distinctively synthesizer-like character.
Adjusts the amount by which the cuto frequency is controlled by the envelope.
Adjusts the amount by which the LFO modulates the cuto frequency.
Adjusts the amount by which the keyboard pitch aects the cuto frequency (key follow). With smaller values, the cuto frequency becomes lower as you play higher notes.
Species whether the volume is controlled by the ENV (ENV F&A) or by the gate signal (G-AMP).
Species the range of pitch change produced by pitch bend.
Species the range of lter change produced by pitch bend.
Species the amount of LFO applied by modulation.
Turns portamento on/o. If this is “ON,” the pitch will change smoothly from one note to the next-played note.
Adjusts the time over which the portamento pitch change occurs.
Change according to the original curve of the model.
Adjusts the modulation depth.
Adjusts the pulse width.
27
50
108
3
9
81
28
82
41
14
118
5
Parameter Value Explanation CC#
Species how notes are sounded. 119
POLY Polyphonic
KEY MODE
AFT LFO
AFT FREQ
AFT LEVEL
PITCH DRIFT
PARAM EXPANSION
CONDITION
SOLO Monophonic
UNISON Unison
SL-UNISON Monophonic unison
-63–+63
-63–+63
-63–+63
0–255
OFF, ON
0–100
Sets how much aftertouch changes the LFO intensity.
* This is only enabled for products with aftertouch.
Sets how much aftertouch changes the low-pass lter intensity.
* This is only enabled for keyboards with aftertouch.
Sets how much aftertouch changes the tone volume.
* This is only enabled for keyboards with aftertouch.
Adjusts the slight pitch drift that occurs when notes are played on an analog synthesizer.
When this is set to “ON,” the LFO RATE, CUTOFF and RESONANCE produce greater change.
Simulates the changes that occur as a unit ages.
TONE
JUNO-60
Parameter Value Explanation CC #
LFO RATE
LFO DELAY TIME
OCTAVE
OSC LFO MOD
PULSE WIDTH MOD
PW MODE
PW SWITCH
SAW SWITCH
SUB LEVEL
NOISE LEVEL
HPF-STEP
VINTAGE FLT T YPE
CUTOFF
RESONANCE
FLT ENV DEPTH
FILTER MOD
0–1023 Species the speed of the LFO cycle.
0–1023
DOWN, NORMAL, UP
0–100 Uses the LFO to vary the pitch (vibrato).
0–127
Species the pulse width mode.
LFO The pulse width is aected by the LFO.
MANUAL
ENV The pulse width is aected by ENV.
OFF, ON Turns the pulse wave on/o.
OFF, ON Turns the sawtooth wave on/o.
0–255 Adjusts the volume of the sub oscillator. 18
0–255 Adjusts the volume of the noise. 19
0–3
R, M, S
0–1023
0–1023
-1023–+1023
0–100
Adjusts the time from when the key is pressed until LFO modulation starts to apply.
Species the octave of the oscillator.
PM MODE = LFO:
PM MODE = MANUAL:
PM MODE = ENV:
The pulse width is aected by PULSE WIDTH MOD.
Sets the high-pass lter’s cuto frequency in four steps.
Selects one of three response curves, each modeling the LPF of an analog synthesizer of the past.
Species the cuto frequency of the low-pass lter. The frequency region above the cuto frequency is cut, producing a more mellow tonal character.
Boosts the region of the lter’s cuto frequency. Higher values produce a stronger result, giving the sound a distinctively synthesizer-like character.
Adjusts the amount by which the cuto frequency is controlled by the envelope.
Adjusts the amount by which the LFO modulates the cuto frequency.
Adjusts the degree of pulse width change based on the LFO.
Adjusts the pulse width value.
Adjusts the degree of pulse width change based on the ENV.
108
3
9
81
28
20
Page 21
Tone Parameters
o
R
Pan
Parameter Value Explanation CC #
Adjusts the amount by which the keyboard pitch aects the cuto frequency (key
FLT KEY FOLLOW
0–200
follow). With smaller values, the cuto frequency becomes lower as you play higher
82
notes.
AMP ENV SEL
AMP LEVEL
ENV ATTACK
ENV DECAY
ENV SUSTAIN
ENV RELEASE
BEND PITCH
BEND FILTER
MODULATION LFO
ENV F&A, G-AMP
0–127 Adjusts the volume of the tone. 110
0–1023 Species the ENV Attack time. 89
0–1023 Species the ENV Decay time. 90
0–1023 Species the ENV Sustain level. 102
0–1023 Species the ENV Release time. 103
0–700
-63–+63
-63–+63
Species whether the volume is controlled by the ENV (ENV F&A) or by the gate signal (G-AMP).
Species the range of pitch change produced by pitch bend.
Species the range of lter change produced by pitch bend.
Species the amount of LFO applied by modulation.
41
14
Turns portamento on/o. If this is “ON,” the
PORTA MODE
PORTA TIME
OFF, ON
0–1023
pitch will change smoothly from one note to the next-played note.
Adjusts the time over which the portamento pitch change occurs.
118
5
Species the pitch change curve for portamento.
Change according to the original curve of the model.
PORTA CRV
ORIGINAL
LINEAR Change in a linear curve.
EXP1 Change in a non-linear curve (gentle slope).
EXP2 Change in a non-linear curve (steep slope).
Species how notes are sounded.
POLY Polyphonic
KEY MODE
SOLO Monophonic
119
UNISON Unison
SL-UNISON Monophonic unison
Sets how much aftertouch changes the LFO
AFT LFO
-63–+63
intensity.
* This is only enabled for products with
aftertouch.
Sets how much aftertouch changes the
AFT FREQ
-63–+63
low-pass lter intensity.
* This is only enabled for keyboards with
aftertouch.
Sets how much aftertouch changes the tone
AFT LEVEL
PITCH DRIFT
PARAM EXPANSION
CONDITION
-63–+63
0–255
OFF, ON
0–100
volume.
* This is only enabled for keyboards with
aftertouch.
Adjusts the slight pitch drift that occurs when notes are played on an analog synthesizer.
If this is “ON,” the range of change for LFO RATE is wider than on the original model.
Simulates the changes that occur as a unit ages.
TONE
VOCODER, PR-A DRUM, CMN DRUM
There are no displayed parameters.
TONE
XV-5080, RD-PIANO, PR-A, PR-B, PD-C, PR-D, COMMON, PR-X
* The CCs that are supported dier with each partial. (p. 30)
Parameter Value Explanation
Tone PMT
Ptl Sw
Key Rng Low
Key Rng Upp
Key Fade Low
Key Fade Upp
Velo Rng Low
Velo Rng Upp
Velo FadeLow
Velo FadeUpp
Tone PTL
Level
Coarse Tune
Fine Tune
Pit Rnd
Pan
Pan Keyf
OFF, ON
C-–G9
C-–G9
0–127
0–127
1–127
1–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
-48–+48
-50–+50
0–1200
L64–63R
-100–+100
Use these switch to turn the partials on/o.
Specify the key range for each partial. Make these settings when you want dierent key ranges to play dierent tones. Specify the lower limit (Low) and upper limit (Upp) of the key range.
Species the degree to which the partial is sounded by notes played below the Key Rng Low. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Species the degree to which the partial is sounded by notes played above the Key Rng Upp. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Specify the lower limit (Low) and upper limit (Upp) of the velocities that will sound the partial. Make these settings when you want dierent partials to sound depending on keyboard playing dynamics.
Species the degree to which the partial is sounded by notes played more softly than Velo Rng Low. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Species the degree to which the partial is sounded by notes played more strongly than Velo Rng Upp. If you don’t want the tone to sound at all, set this parameter to “0.”
Sets the volume of the partial. This setting is useful primarily for adjusting the volume balance between partials.
Adjusts the pitch of the sound up or down in semitone steps (+/-4 octaves).
Adjusts the pitch of the sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/-50 cents).
This species the width of random pitch deviation that will occur each time a key is pressed. If you do not want the pitch to change randomly, set this to “0.”
* These values are in units of cents (1/100th of a
semitone).
Sets the pan of the partial. “L64” is far lef t, “0” is center, and “63R” is far right.
Use this parameter if you want key position to aect panning. Positive (+) value will cause notes higher than C4 key (center C) to be panned increasingly further toward the right, and negative (-) value will cause notes higher than C4 key (center C) to be panned toward the left. Higher values will produce greater change.
L
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
+100
+50
0
-50
-100 Key
Use this parameter when you want the stereo location to change randomly each time you press
Pan Rnd
0–63
a key. Higher values will produce a greater amount of change.
21
Page 22
Tone Parameters
T1 T2 T3 T4
L3
L1
L2
Note o
Level
Time
Note on
T: Time L: Level
Note o
Note on
Note o
Delay time
Note on
No sound played
Note o
Delay time
Note on
Note o
Delay time
Note on
Parameter Value Explanation
This setting causes panning to be alternated between left and right each time a key is pressed. Higher values will produce a greater amount of change. “L” or “R” settings will reverse the order
Pan Alt
L64–63R
in which the pan will alternate between left and right. For example if two partials are set to “L” and “R” respectively, the panning of the two tones will alternate each time they are played.
If this is set to SUSTAIN, the Envelope Level 3 is held from when the envelope Time 3 has elapsed until note-o. When note-o occurs, the envelope transitions from the current value to the Time 4 segment (release segment). If this is set to NO-SUS, the envelope transitions to the release segment after passing Time 3 regardless of
Env Mode
NO-SUS, SUSTAIN
the note-o timing, operating according to the times specied by the envelope.
Partial Delay
This produces a time delay between the moment a key is pressed (or released), and the moment the partial actually begins to sound. You can also make settings that shift the timing at which each partial is sounded. This diers from the Delay in the internal eects, in that by changing the sound qualities of the delayed partials and changing the pitch
DlyMod
for each partial, you can also perform arpeggio-like passages just by pressing one key. You can also synchronize the partial delay time to the tempo of the external MIDI sequencer. If Retrig Intvl (Legato Retrigger Interval) is other than OFF, legato operation occurs only when Delay Mode is NORMAL. Also in this case, Retrig Intvl (Legato Retrigger Interval) operates as “0” (retriggers at each Delay Time).
The partial begins to play after the time specied in the Partial Delay Time parameter has elapsed.
NORMAL
Delay time
Although the partial begins to play after the time specied in the Partial Delay Time parameter has elapsed, if the key is released before the time specied in the Partial Delay Time parameter has elapsed, the partial is not played.
HOLD
DlyMod
Rather than being played while the key is pressed, the partial begins to play once the period of time specied in the Partial Delay Time parameter has elapsed after release of the key. This is eective in situations such as when simulating noises from guitars and other
KEYOFF-NORMAL
instruments.
No Partial Delay
Parameter Value Explanation
Rather than being played while the key is pressed, the partial begins to play once the period of time specied in the Partial Delay Time parameter has elapsed after release of the key. Here, however, changes in the TVA Envelope begin while the
DlyMod
KEYOFF DECAY
key is pressed, which in many cases means that only the sound from the release portion of the envelope is heard.
Dly Time Sync
OFF, ON
Set this ON if you want the partial delay time to synchronize with the tempo.
1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32.,
Dly Time Note
1/16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4,
This is available when Dly Time Sync is “ON.” It
species the delay time in terms of a note value. 1/2T, 1/4., 1/2, 1T, 1/2., 1, 2T, 1., 2
This is available when Dly Time Sync is OFF. It
Dly Time
Cho Send
Rev Send
0–1023
0–127
0–127
species the delay time without regard to the
tempo.
Species the level of the signal sent to the chorus
for each partial.
Species the level of the signal sent to the reverb
for each partial.
Species for each partial whether MIDI pitch
Rx Bend
Rx Expr
Rx Hold
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
bend messages are received (ON) or not received
(OFF).
Species for each partial whether MIDI expression
messages are received (ON) or not received (OFF).
Species for each partial whether MIDI hold 1
messages are received (ON) or not received (OFF).
If Redamp Sw is ON, you can perform the Half
Damper operations used for piano sounds.
However, the following conditions must be
Redamp Sw
OFF, ON
satised in order to use this operation.
¹Env Mode is NO-SUS ¹Amp Env’s Level 1 and 2 are 1 or greater ¹Amp Env’s Times are Time 3 > Time4
Out Assign
Wav Gr Type
DRY, MFX
INT, EXT
Species how the sound of each partial will be
output.
Species the type of wave group.
* If an expansion is installed, “EXT” is shown.
Sets the wave group ID within the specied wave
Wav Gr ID
Wav L No. [Wave Name]
Wav R No. [Wave Name]
Wav Gain
A - E
(Wave number)
(Wave name)
(Wave number)
(Wave name)
-18, -12, -6, 0, +6, +12 [dB]
group type.
* This is enabled when Wav Gr Type is “INT.” * If an expansion is installed, the expansion name
“EXZ***” is shown.
Species the Wave within the wave group ID. For
mono use, specify only the left side (L).
For stereo use, specify the right side (R) as well.
If the sound will be played in mono, specify only
Wav L No., and leave Wav R No. set as “0” (OFF).
Sound is not produced if you specify only Wav R
No.
Species the gain (amplitude) of the waveform.
The value will change in 6 dB (decibel) steps.
Each 6 dB increase doubles the gain.
This sets whether FXM will be used (ON) or not
(OFF).
FXM Sw
OFF, ON
* FXM (Frequency Cross Modulation) uses a specied
waveform to apply frequency modulation to the currently selected waveform, creating complex overtones. This is useful for creating dramatic sounds or sound eects.
Species how FXM will perform frequency
FXM Color
1–4
modulation. Higher settings result in a grainier
sound, while lower settings result in a more
metallic sound.
FXM Depth
0–16
Species the depth of the modulation produced
by FXM.
22
Page 23
Tone Parameters
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
0
+50
+100
+200
-50
-100-200
Key
Pitch
-200
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
+50
+100
-100
o
-1
-2
+1
+2
Cuto frequency (Octave)
Key
0
+200
-50
-200
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LPF BPF HPF PKG
Level
Frequency
Cuto Frequency
High
Low
parameter value
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Parameter Value Explanation
Pit Keyf
Soft EQ Sens
TVF Type
Cuto
This species the amount of pitch change that will occur when you play a key one octave higher (i.e., 12 keys upward on the keyboard). If you want the pitch to rise one octave as on a conventional keyboard, set this to “+100.” If you want the pitch to rise two octaves, set this to “+200.” Conversely, set this to a negative (-) value if you want the pitch to fall. With a setting of “0,” all keys will produce the
-200–+200
same pitch.
Increases the proportion by which the EQ’s
0–100
HighGain is lowered by the amount of pedal. With a setting of “0,” this has no eect.
Selects the type of TVF lter.
* If Filter Type is set to VCF, this will be LPF.
OFF No lter is used.
Low Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies in the region above the cuto frequency.
LPF
high-frequency region, the sound becomes more mellow. This is the most common lter used in synthesizers
Band Pass Filter. This leaves only the frequencies
BPF
in the region of the cuto frequency, and cuts the rest. This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds.
High Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies in the
HPF
region below the cuto frequency. This is suitable for creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher tones.
Peaking Filter. This emphasizes the frequencies
PKG
in the region of the cuto frequency. You can use this to create wah-wah eects by employing an LFO to change the cuto frequency cyclically.
Low Pass Filter 2. Although frequency components above the cuto frequency are cut, the sensitivity of this lter is half that of the LPF.
LPF2
This makes it a comparatively warmer low pass lter. This lter is good for use with simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic piano.
* If you set “LPF2,” the setting for the Resonance
parameter will be ignored (p. 23).
Low Pass Filter 3. Although frequency components above the cuto frequency are cut, the sensitivity of this lter changes according to the cuto frequency. While this lter is also
LPF3
good for use with simulated acoustic instrument sounds, the nuance it exhibits diers from that of the LPF2, even with the same TVF Envelope settings.
* If you set “LPF3,” the setting for the Resonance
parameter will be ignored (p. 23).
Selects the frequency at which the lter begins to have an eect on the waveform’s frequency components.
If “LPF/LPF2/LPF3” is selected for the TVF Type
Lower cuto frequency settings reduce a tone’s upper harmonics for a more rounded, warmer sound. Higher settings make it sound brighter.
If “BPF” is selected for the TVF Type
0–1023
Harmonic components will change depending on the TVF cuto frequency setting. This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds.
If “HPF” is selected for the TVF Type
Higher cuto frequency settings will reduce lower harmonics to emphasize just the brighter components of the sound.
If “PKG” is selected for the TVF Type
The harmonics to be emphasized will vary depending on cuto frequency setting.
Parameter Value Explanation
Use this parameter if you want the cuto
frequency to change according to the key that is
pressed. Relative to the cuto frequency at the
key specied by Cuto Keyf BP (Cuto Keyfollow
Base Point), positive “+” values cause the cuto
frequency to become higher as you play above
the reference key, and negative “-” values cause
the cuto frequency to become lower.
Higher values will produce greater change.
Cuto Keyf
-200–+200
Selects one of the following seven curves that
determine how keyboard playing dynamics
(velocity) inuence the cuto frequency. Set this
to “FIXED” if you don’t want the cuto frequency
to be aected by the keyboard velocity.
Use this parameter when changing the cuto
Since this cuts the
Cuto VCrv
FIXED, 1–7
frequency to be applied as a result of changes
.
Cuto VSens
-100–+100
in playing velocity. Specify a positive “+” value if
you want the cuto frequency to raise when you
play strongly, or a negative “-” value if you want it
to lower.
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the
region of the cuto frequency, adding character
to the sound. Excessively high settings can
produce oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
Resonance
0–1023
Use this parameter when changing the
resonance to be applied as a result of changes
Reso VSens
-100–+100
in playing velocity. Specify a positive “+” value if
you want resonance to increase when you play
strongly, or a negative “-” value if you want it to
decrease.
Adjusts the angle of the volume change that will
occur in the selected Bias Direction.
Bias Lv
-100–+100
Higher values will produce greater change.
Negative (-) values will invert the change
direction.
Species the key relative to which the volume
Bias Pos
0–127
will be modied. A setting of 64 is the C4 key
(middle C).
Selects the direction in which change will occur starting from the Bias Position.
The volume will be modied for the keyboard
area below the Bias Point.
The volume will be modied for the keyboard
area above the Bias Point.
The volume will be modied symmetrically
toward the left and right of the Bias Point.
The volume changes linearly with the bias point
at the center.
Bias Dir
LOWER
UPPER
LOWER&UPPER
ALL
Selects one of the following seven curves that
determine how keyboard dynamics will aect
the volume of the partial. Set this to “FIXED” if
you don’t want the volume of the partial to be
aected by the keyboard velocity.
Level VCrv
FIXED, 1–7
23
Page 24
Tone Parameters
0
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
-50
-100
+50
+100
Key
Time
0
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
-50
-100
+50
+100
Key
Time
Time
Parameter Value Explanation
Set this when you want the volume of the partial to change depending on the force with which you press the keys.
Level VSens
-100–+100
Set this to a positive (+) value to have the changes in partial volume increase the more forcefully the keys are played; to make the partial play more softly as you play harder, set this to a negative (-) value.
Use this setting if you want the pitch envelope times (Time 2–Time 4) to be aected by the keyboard location. Based on the pitch envelope times for the C4 key, positive (+) value will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times, and negative (-) value will cause them to have increasingly longer times.
PEnv TKeyf
-100–+100
Higher values will produce greater change.
Specify this if you want the lter envelope times (Time 2–Time 4) to vary depending on the keyboard position you play. Relative to the lter envelope times at the C4 key (middle C), positive “+” values shorten the times for notes played in the region above C4, and negative “-” values lengthen the times. Higher values will produce greater change.
FEnv TKeyf
-100–+100
Parameter Value Explanation
Sets the MIDI message used to change the partial parameter with the Matrix Control.
OFF Matrix control will not be used.
CC01–CC31, CC33–CC95
Controller number 1–31, 33–95
BEND Pitch bend
AFT Aftertouch
SYS-CTRL1–4
MIDI messages assigned by the SYSTEM
parameters, MIDI: SysCtrlSrc1–4
VELOCITY Velocity (pressure you press a key with)
KEYFOLLOW Keyfollow (keyboard position with C4 as 0)
TEMPO, Tempo specied by the tempo assign source
LFO1, LFO2
LFO 1
LFO 2
PIT-ENV Pitch envelope
Mctl1 Src Mctl2 Src Mctl3 Src Mctl4 Src
TVF-ENV Filter envelope
TVA-ENV Amp envelope
* Velocity and Keyfollow correspond to Note messages. * Although there are no MIDI messages for LFO 1 through AMP Envelope, they
can be used as Matrix Control. In this case, you can change the partial settings in realtime by playing tones.
* If you want to use common controllers for the entire JUNO-X, select
“SYS-CTRL1”–”SYS-CTRL4.” MIDI messages used as System Control 1–4 are set with the SyCtrlSrc1-4. For details, refer to “System Parameters” (p. 31).
NOTE
¹There are parameters that determine whether or not Pitch Bend,
Controller Number 11 (Expression) and Controller Number 64 (Hold
1) are received (p. 22). When these settings are “ON,” and the MIDI messages are received, then when any change is made in the settings of the desired parameter, the Pitch Bend, Expression, and Hold 1 settings also change simultaneously. If you want to change the targeted parameters only, then set these to “OFF.”
¹There are parameters that let you specify whether specic MIDI
messages will be received for each zone in a scene (p. 5). When a tone with Matrix Control settings is assigned to a zone, conrm that any MIDI messages used for the Matrix Control will be received. If the JUNO-X is set up such that reception of MIDI messages is disabled, then the Matrix Control will not function.
Selects the partial parameter that is to be controlled when using the Matrix Control. When not controlling parameters with the Matrix Control, set this to “OFF.” Up to four parameters can be specied for each Matrix Control, and controlled simultaneously.
OFF Matrix control will not be used.
PCH Changes the pitch.
CUT Changes the cuto frequency.
RES
Emphasizes the overtones in the region of the
cuto frequency, adding character to the sound.
LEV Changes the volume level.
PAN Changes the pan.
CHO Changes the amount of chorus.
REV Changes the amount of reverb.
PIT-LFO1, PIT-LFO2 Changes the vibrato depth.
TVF-LFO1, TVF-LFO2
TVA-LFO1, TVA-LFO2
PAN-LFO1, PAN-LFO2
LFO1-RATE LFO2-RATE
Changes the wah depth.
Changes the tremolo depth.
Changes the eect that the LFO will have on pan.
Changes the speed of the LFO cycles. The speed
will not change if LFO Rate is set to “note.”
AEnv Tkeyf
Vib Pit Sens
Vib Cut Sens
Vib Amp Sens
-100–+100
-100–+100
-100–+100
-100–+100
Specify this if you want keyboard position to aect the AMP envelope’s times (Time 2–Time 4). Relative to the AMP envelope times at the C4 key (middle C), positive (+) values cause the times to shorten as you play higher on the keyboard, and negative (-) values cause the times to lengthen. Higher values will produce greater change.
-100
-50
0
+50
+100
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
Key
Species the amount by which the Pitch Depth of LFO1 is changed by the SCENE PART, MODIFY: Vib Depth.
Species how the TVF Depth of LFO1 is aected by the SCENE PART, MODIFY: Vib Depth.
Species how the SCENE PART, MODIFY: Vib Depth aects the Amp Depth of LFO1.
Mctl1 Dst1–4 Mctl2 Dst1–4 Mctl3 Dst1–4 Mctl4 Dst1–4
PIT-ATK Changes the Time 1 of the pitch envelope.
PIT-DCY
Changes the Time 2 and Env Time 3 of the pitch
envelope.
PIT-REL Changes the Time 4 of the pitch envelope.
TVF-ATK Changes the Time 1 of the FLT envelope.
TVF-DCY
Changes the Time 2 and Env Time 3 of the FLT
envelope.
TVF-REL Changes the Time 4 of the FLT envelope.
24
T VA-AT K Changes the Time 1 of the AMP envelope.
TVA-DCY
Changes the Time 2 and Env Time 3 of the AMP
envelope.
TVA-REL Changes the Time 4 of the AMP envelope.
Page 25
Tone Parameters
T1 T2 T3 T4
L1
L0
Pitch
Note on
T
Time  LLevel
L3
L2
Note o
Time
L4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Parameter Value Explanation
PMT
FXM
MFX-CTL1–4
PW Applies change to PW.
PWM Applies change to PWM.
FAT Applies change to FAT.
XMOD
Mctl1 Dst1–4 Mctl2 Dst1–4
LFO1-STP LFO2-STP
Mctl3 Dst1–4 Mctl4 Dst1–4
SSAW-DTN
PIT-DPTH Changes the depth of the Pitch envelope.
TVF-DPTH Changes the depth of the Filter envelope.
TVA-DPTH Changes the depth of the AMP envelope.
XMOD2
AT T Changes the OSC level.
R-OSC1-LV
R-OSC2-LV
X-OSC1-LV
X-OSC2-LV
Mctl1 Sns1–4 Mctl2 Sns1–4 Mctl3 Sns1–4
-63–+63
Mctl4 Sns1–4
Damp Free
Stereo Width
Stereo Detn
DF Dcy Oset
Tempo Sync
OFF, 1–127
0–100
-50–+50
-100–+100
OFF, ON
If the Matrix Control is used to split partials, set the PMT Velocity Control (p. 17) to “OFF.”
¹If the Matrix Control is used to split partials,
we recommend setting the Mctl Sns (p. 25) to “+63.” Selecting a lower value may prevent switching of the partials. Furthermore, if you want to reverse the eect, set the value to “-63.”
¹If you want to use matrix control to switch
smoothly between partials, use the Velocity Fade Lower and Velocity Fade Upper (p. 21). The higher the values set, the smoother the switch is between the partials.
Changing the depth of frequency modulation produced by FXM
Applies a change to MFX Src1-4. If this is specied for more than one partial, the result will be the summed values.
This setting is valid only for the carrier partial (Partial 1 or 3), and applies change to the XMd12 Dpth or XMd34 Dpth.
This is valid if the LFO1/LFO2 Waveform is STEP; it species the step position. In this case, the Sns value is ignored.
This is eective if OSC Type is SuperSAW; it applies change to Super-SAW Detune.
This is eective when Structure 1-2 (3-4) is XMOD2; it applies change to XMd2 12 (34) Dpth.
This is valid only for Partial 1 and 3; when Structure 12 (or Structure 34 in the case of Partial
3) is RING, this changes the OSC level of Partial 1 (or 3 in the case of Partial 3).
This is valid only for Partial 1 and 3; when Structure 12 (or Structure 34 in the case of Partial
3) is RING, this changes the OSC level of Partial 2 (or 4 in the case of Partial 3).
This is valid only for Partial 1 and 3; when Structure 12 (or Structure 34 in the case of Partial
3) is XMOD/XMOD2, this changes the OSC level of Partial 1 (or 3 in the case of Partial 3).
This is valid only for Partial 1 and 3; when Structure 12 (or Structure 34 in the case of Partial
3) is XMOD/XMOD2, this changes the OSC level of Partial 2 (or 4 in the case of Partial 3).
Specify the eective depth of the matrix controls. To make an increase in the currently selected value (to get higher values, move to the right, increase rates, and so on), select a positive (+) value; to make a decrease in the currently selected value (to get lower values, move to the left, decrease rates, and so on), select a negative (-) value. For either positive or negative value, greater absolute values will allow greater amounts of change. Set this to “0” if you don’t want to apply the eect.
For notes above the specied note number, the Env Mode operates as NO-SUS. Use this to simulate the undamped region of a piano sound.
Adjusts the amount of width when outputting in stereo. This has no eect when outputting in mono.
Species the detune between LÕR when outputting in stereo.
Species a ne adjustment to the time over which the sound decays when the Damper Free eect is applied.
Set this ON if you want the LFO rate to synchronize with the tempo.
Parameter Value Explanation
Pitch Env
Adjusts the eect of the Pitch Envelope. Higher
settings will cause the pitch envelope to produce
Pit Depth
-100–+100
greater change. Negative (-) value will invert the
shape of the envelope.
If OSC Type is other than VA, this is limited to
±63.
Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to
control the depth of the pitch envelope. If you
want the pitch envelope to have more eect for
Pit VSens
-100–+100
strongly played notes, set this parameter to a
positive (+) value. If you want the pitch envelope
to have less eect for strongly played notes, set
this to a negative (-) value.
This allows keyboard dynamics to aect the Time
1 of the Pitch envelope.
Pit T1 VSens
-100–+100
If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly
played notes, set this parameter to a positive “+”
value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this
to a negative “-” value.
Use this parameter when you want key release
speed to aect the Time 4 value of the pitch
envelope.
Pit T4 VSens
-100–+100
If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly
released notes, set this parameter to a positive (+)
value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this
to a negative (-) value.
Specify the pitch envelope times (Time 1–Time 4).
Higher settings will result in a longer time until
the next pitch is reached. (For example, Time 2
is the time over which the pitch changes from
Level 1 to Level 2.)
Pit Time1 Pit Time2 Pit Time3
0–1023
* If ADSR Envelope Switch is ON, the Time 2 has no
eect.
Pit Time4
Specify the pitch envelope levels (Level 0–Level
4).
It determines how much the pitch changes from
Pit Lv0 Pit Lv1 Pit Lv2 Pit Lv3 Pit Lv4
-511–+511
the reference pitch (the value set with Coarse
Tune or Fine Tune on the Pitch screen) at each
point.
Positive (+) value will cause the pitch to be
higher than the standard pitch, and negative (-)
value will cause it to be lower.
* If ADSR Envelope Switch is ON, only Level 3 (Sustain)
has an eect. Also in this case, settings with a negative value are ignored.
Selects one of the following 7 curves that will
determine how keyboard playing dynamics will
aect the pitch envelope.
Set this to “FIXED” if you don’t want the pitch
envelope be aected by the keyboard velocity.
Pit VCrv
FIXED, 1–7
Filter Env
Species the depth of the Filter envelope. Higher
Filtr Depth
Filtr VCrv
Filtr VSens
-63–+63
FIXED, 1–7
-100–+100
settings increase the change produced by the
Filter envelope.
Negative (-) value will invert the shape of the
envelope.
Selects one of the following seven types of curve
by which keyboard playing dynamics aect the
depth of the lter envelope.
If you don’t want keyboard playing dynamics to
aect the lter envelope depth, specify “FIXED.”
Specify this if you want keyboard playing
dynamics to aect the lter envelope depth.
Specify a positive “+” value if you want the lter
envelope to apply more deeply as you play more
strongly, or a negative “-” value if you want it to
apply less deeply.
25
Page 26
Tone Parameters
T1 T2 T3 T4
Note o
Cuto
Frequency
Time
Note on
T: Time L: Level
L3L0L2L1 L4
T1 T2 T3 T4
L3
L1
L2
Note o
Level
Time
Note on
T: Time L: Level
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
Key
Time
0
-50
-100
+50
+100
Parameter Value Explanation
Specify this if you want keyboard playing dynamics to aect Time 1 of the lter envelope.
Filtr T1 VSens
-100–+100
If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes, set this parameter to a positive “+” value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative “-” value.
Specify this if you want key release velocity to aect Time 4 of the lter envelope. If you want
Filtr T4 VSens
-100–+100
Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Specify the lter envelope times (Time 1–Time 4). Higher settings will lengthen the time until the next cuto frequency level is reached. (For example, Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level 2.)
Filtr Time1 Filtr Time2 Filtr Time3
0–1023
* If ADSR Envelope Switch is ON, the Time 2 has no
eect.
Filtr Time4
Filtr Lv0 Filtr Lv1 Filtr Lv2 Filtr Lv3 Filtr Lv4
0–1023
Specify the lter envelope levels (Level 0–Level 4). Specify the amount of cuto frequency change at each point relative to the reference cuto frequency (the cuto frequency value specied in the Filter screen).
* If ADSR Envelope Switch is ON, only Level 3 (Sustain)
has an eect.
Amp Env
Specify this if you want keyboard dynamics to aect the AMP envelope’s Time 1. If you want
Amp T1 VSens
Amp T4 VSens
Amp Time1 Amp Time2 Amp Time3 Amp Time4
Amp Lv1 Amp Lv2 Amp Lv3
-100–+100
-100–+100
0–1023
0–1023
Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Specify this if you want key release velocity to aect the AMP envelope’s Time 4. If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Specify the AMP envelope times (Time 1–Time 4). Higher settings lengthen the time until the next volume level is reached. (For example, Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level
2.)
* If ADSR Envelope Switch is ON, the Time 2 has no
eect.
Specify the AMP envelope levels (Level 1–Level 3). These specify the amount of change at each point relative to the reference volume (the partial level value specied in the Amp screen).
* If ADSR Envelope Switch is ON, only Level 3 (Sustain)
has an eect.
Parameter Value Explanation
LFO1
Selects the waveform of the LFO.
SIN Sine wave
TRI Triangle wave
SAW-UP Sawtooth wave
SAW-DW Sawtooth wave (negative polarity)
SQR Square wave
RND Random wave
L1 Waveform
L1 Rate Sync
L1 Rate Note
L1 Step Len
L1 Rate
L1 Oset
L1 Rate Detn
L1 Dly Time
L1 Dly Keyf
TRP Trapezoidal wave
S&H
Sample & Hold wave (one time per cycle, LFO
value is changed)
CHS Chaos wave
VSIN
Modied sine wave. The amplitude of a sine
wave is randomly varied once each cycle.
A waveform generated by the data specied by STEP
LFO Step 1–16. This produces stepped change
with a xed pattern similar to a step modulator.
OFF, ON
Set this ON if you want the LFO rate to
synchronize with the tempo.
1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32., 1/16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4,
Species the LFO rate in terms of a note value.
* This is eective if Rate Sync is “ON.”
1/2T, 1/4., 1/2, 1T, 1/2., 1, 2T, 1., 2, 4
1–16
Species the step size that is looped.
* This is eective if Waveform is STEP.
Species the LFO rate without regard to the
0–1023
tempo. Higher values produce a faster LFO rate (a
shorter cycle).
* This is eective if Rate Sync is OFF.
Raises or lowers the LFO waveform relative to
the central value (pitch or cuto frequency).
Positive (+) value will move the waveform so
-100–+100
that modulation will occur from the central
value upward. Negative (-) value will move the
waveform so that modulation will occur from the
central value downward.
Subtly changes the LFO cycle speed (Rate
parameter) each time you press a key. Higher 0–127
values produce greater change.
This parameter is invalid when Rate is set to
“note.”
Species the time elapsed before the LFO eect
0–1023
is applied (the eect continues) after the key is
pressed (or released).
* After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 29),
change the setting until the desired eect is achieved.
Adjusts the value for the Delay Time parameter
depending on the key position, relative to the C4
key (center C). To decrease the time that elapses
before the LFO eect is applied (the eect is
continuous) with each higher key that is pressed
in the upper registers, select a positive (+) value;
to increase the elapsed time, select a negative (-)
value. Higher values will produce greater change.
If you do not want the elapsed time before the
LFO eect is applied (the eect is continuous) to
-100–+100
change according to the key pressed, set this to
“0.”
26
L1 Fade Mod
ON-IN, ON-OUT, OFF-IN, OFF-OUT
Species how the LFO will be applied.
* After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 29),
change the setting until the desired eect is achieved.
Species the time over which the LFO amplitude
L1 Fade Time
0–1023
will reach the maximum (minimum).
* After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 29),
change the setting until the desired eect is achieved.
Page 27
Tone Parameters
C4C3C2C1 C5 C6 C7
Key
Time
0
-50
-100
+50
+100
Parameter Value Explanation
Species whether the LFO cycle will be
L1 Key Trig
L1 Pit Depth
L1 Flt Depth
L1 Amp Depth
OFF, ON
-100–+100
-100–+100
-100–+100
synchronized to begin when the key is pressed (ON) or not (OFF).
Species how deeply the LFO will aect pitch.
* If OSC Type is other than VA, the range is limited to
-63–+63.
Species how deeply the LFO will aect the cuto frequency.
Species how deeply the LFO will aect the volume.
Species how deeply the LFO will aect the pan.
MEMO
Positive (+) and negative (-) value for the Depth parameter result in diering kinds of change in pitch and volume. For example, if you set
L1 Pan Depth
-63–+63
the Depth parameter to a positive (+) value for one partial, and set another partial to the same numerical value, but make it negative (-), the modulation phase for the two partials will be the reverse of each other. This allows you to shift back and forth between two dierent partials, or combine it with the Pan setting to cyclically change the location of the sound image.
Species the LFO’s starting phase value when Key Trigger is “ON.”
* This has no eect if Waveform is RND, S&H, or CHS.
0 1 cycle
L1 Phase Pos
1 1/4 cycle
2 1/2 cycle
3 3/4 cycle
Parameter Value Explanation
This is eective if Rate Sync is OFF.
L2 Rate
0–1023
Species the LFO rate without regard to the
tempo. Higher values produce a faster LFO rate (a
shorter cycle).
Raises or lowers the LFO waveform relative to
the central value (pitch or cuto frequency).
Positive (+) value will move the waveform so
L2 Oset
-100–+100
that modulation will occur from the central
value upward. Negative (-) value will move the
waveform so that modulation will occur from the
central value downward.
Subtly changes the LFO cycle speed (Rate
L2 Rate Detn
0–127
parameter) each time you press a key. Higher
values produce greater change.
This parameter is invalid when Rate is set to “note.”
Species the time elapsed before the LFO eect
L2 Dly Time
0–1023
is applied (the eect continues) after the key is
pressed (or released).
* After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 29),
change the setting until the desired eect is achieved.
Adjusts the value for the Delay Time parameter
depending on the key position, relative to the C4
key (center C). To decrease the time that elapses
before the LFO eect is applied (the eect is
continuous) with each higher key that is pressed
in the upper registers, select a positive (+) value;
to increase the elapsed time, select a negative (-)
value. Higher values will produce greater change.
If you do not want the elapsed time before the
LFO eect is applied (the eect is continuous) to
L2 Dly Keyf
-100–+100
change according to the key pressed, set this to
“0.”
This is eective if Waveform is STEP. Specify the Depth value of each step. If you want to specify this in pitch scale degrees (100 cents), the settings are as follows.
Pitch Depth: 51, Step: multiples of 6 …
1
L1 Stp1–16 Depth
L1 Stp1–16 Curve
-72–+72
0–36
LFO2
Selects the waveform of the LFO.
SIN Sine wave
TRI Triangle wave
SAW-UP Sawtooth wave
SAW-DW Sawtooth wave (negative polarity)
SQR Square wave
RND Random wave
L2 Waveform
L2 Rate Sync
L2 Rate Note
L2 Step Length
TRP Trapezoidal wave
S&H
CHS Chaos wave
VSIN
STEP
OFF, ON
1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32., 1/16, 1/8T, 1/16., 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8., 1/4, 1/2T, 1/4., 1/2, 1T, 1/2., 1, 2T, 1., 2, 4
1–16
up to one octave of change
Pitch Depth: 74, Step: multiples of 3 …
2
up to two octaves of change
Pitch Depth: 89, Step: multiples of 2 …
3
up to three octaves of change
* If OSC Type is not VA, the Pitch Depth setting range is
limited to -63–+63, so only “1” above is possible.
Species the type of curve at each step.
Ø“Step curve types” (p. 29)
Sample & Hold wave (one time per cycle, LFO value is changed)
Modied sine wave. The amplitude of a sine wave is randomly varied once each cycle.
A waveform generated by the data specied by LFO Step 1–16. This produces stepped change with a xed pattern similar to a step modulator.
Set this ON if you want the LFO rate to synchronize with the tempo.
This is eective if Rate Sync is “ON.” Species the LFO rate in terms of a note value.
This is eective if Waveform is STEP. Species the step size that is looped.
L2 Fade Mod
L2 Fade Time
L2 Key Trig
L2 Pit Depth
L2 Flt Depth
L2 Amp Depth
L2 Pan Depth
L2 Phase Pos
ON-IN, ON-OUT, OFF-IN, OFF-OUT
Species how the LFO will be applied.
* After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 29),
change the setting until the desired eect is achieved.
Species the time over which the LFO amplitude
0–1023
will reach the maximum (minimum).
* After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 29),
change the setting until the desired eect is achieved.
Species whether the LFO cycle will be OFF, ON
synchronized to begin when the key is pressed
(ON) or not (OFF).
-100–+100
-100–+100
-100–+100
Species how deeply the LFO will aect pitch.
* If OSC Type is other than VA, the range is limited to
-63–+63.
Species how deeply the LFO will aect the cuto
frequency.
Species how deeply the LFO will aect the
volume.
Species how deeply the LFO will aect the pan.
MEMO
Positive (+) and negative (-) value for the Depth
parameter result in diering kinds of change
in pitch and volume. For example, if you set
-63–+63
the Depth parameter to a positive (+) value for
one partial, and set another partial to the same
numerical value, but make it negative (-), the
modulation phase for the two partials will be
the reverse of each other. This allows you to shift
back and forth between two dierent partials,
or combine it with the Pan setting to cyclically
change the location of the sound image.
Species the LFO’s starting phase value when Key Trigger is “ON.”
* This has no eect if Waveform is RND, S&H, or CHS.
0 1 cycle
1 1/4 cycle
2 1/2 cycle
3 3/4 cycle
27
Page 28
Tone Parameters
Parameter Value Explanation
This is eective if Waveform is STEP. Specify the Depth value of each step. If you want to specify this in pitch scale degrees (100 cents), the settings are as follows.
Pitch Depth: 51, Step: multiples of 6 …
1
L2 Stp1–16 Depth
L2 Stp1–16 Curve
-72–+72
0–36
up to one octave of change
Pitch Depth: 74, Step: multiples of 3 …
2
up to two octaves of change
Pitch Depth: 89, Step: multiples of 2 …
3
up to three octaves of change
* If OSC Type is not VA, the Pitch Depth setting range is
limited to -63–+63, so only “1” above is possible.
Species the type of curve at each step.
Ø“Step curve types” (p. 29)
EQ
Gain L
Gain M
Gain H
Freq L
Freq M
Freq H
Mid Q
EQ Sw
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] Gain of the low range.
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] Gain of the middle range.
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] Gain of the high range
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the low range.
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the middle range.
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the high range.
Width of the middle range.
0.5–16.0
Set a higher value to narrow the range to be aected.
OFF, ON Turns the equalizer on/o for each partial.
Synth PTL
Species the oscillator type.
PCM is used. The wave of the number specied by the Wav Gr ID and Wav L/R No. is used.
A numerically calculated analog-modeled wave is generated. The wave of the number specied by Waveform is used.
The wave of the number specied by Sync Wav No. is used.
When “PCM-Sync” is selected for the OSC Type, set the wave to use here. PCM-Sync is an eective oscillator type when “SYNC” is selected for the structure, when partial 1 is set for Structure 1–2 and when partial 3 is set for Structure 3–4.
This eect is produced when the waveform is deformed by varying the duty cycle of the pulse width. It is eective when OSC Type is VA, and is also eective with waveforms other than SQR (square wave).
* If the value is 64, the pulse width has a 50%:50% duty
cycle.
Species the amount (depth) of LFO applied to PW (Pulse Width). PW is modulated according to the LFO2 setting.
Adjusts the Detune depth for SuperSAW. Higher values produce a deeper Detune eect.
* This is eective only when SuperSAW is selected as
the OSC Type.
OSC Type
Wav Form
Sync Wav No.
Pulse Width
PWM Depth
SSaw Detune
PCM
VA
PCM-Sync
SuperSAW SuperSAW is used.
Noise White noise is used.
Species the wave that is used when OSC Type is VA.
SAW Sawtooth wave
SQR Square wave
TRI Triangle wave
SIN sine wave
RAMP Ramp wave
JUNO Modulated sawtooth wave
TRI2 Triangle wave variation
TRI3 Triangle wave variation
SIN2 Sine wave variation
(Wave number)
(Wave name)
0–127
-63–+63
0–127
Parameter Value Explanation
Changes the sense of attack by varying the
position at which the sound starts.
This is available if OSC Type is VA. However, HARD
is eective only when Waveform is TRI, TRI2, SIN,
or SIN2.
Species the cuto frequency of the -6 dB
high-pass lter.
* This parameter is eective when Filter Type is VCF.
Selects the type of lter.
* TVF stands for Time Variant Filter, a lter that lets you
specify in detail how the frequency components of the sound change over time.
* If you select VCF, the polyphony will be lower than if
you select TVF.
Click Type
HPF Cuto
Filter Type
SOFT, HARD, NATURAL, OFF
0–1023
TVF, VCF
This button selects the slope (steepness) of the
lter.
For VCF, you can choose -12, -18, or -24.
For TVF, only -12 or -24 can be selected.
Flt Slope
-12,
-18,
-24 [dB/Oct]
If Filter Type is TVF, the following limitations
apply.
¹You can specify only -12 dB or -24 dB. If you
specify -18 dB, the sound generator operates internally with the -12 dB setting.
¹If you specify -24 dB, the polyphony will be
lower than if you specify -12 dB.
This imitates the operation of the ADSR envelope
that is provided on an analog synthesizer.
ADSR Env Sw
OFF, ON
If ADSR Env Sw is ON, the “Time 2” parameters
of Pitch/Filter/Amp Env Time respectively are
ignored, and only the “Level 3” parameters of
Pitch/Filter/Amp Env Level are valid.
Fat
0–127
Boosts the low-frequency region.
This is eective if OSC Type is VA.
This parameter is eective when Filter Type is
VCF Type
VCF1, J P, MG, P5
VCF.
Each setting simulates the operation of an
analog synthesizer’s LPF. In par ticular, MG, JP, and
P5 are types that are suitable for reproducing
synthesizer sounds of the past.
Species the OSC level.
OSC Attenuator
0–255
255 is the reference value. If you want only the
self-oscillation of the lter to be heard, set this to
“0.”
Species the reference key when using Keyfollow
Cuto Keyf BP
VA Invert Sw
FEnv Fine Depth
PEnvLFOTrig Sw
FEnvLFOTrig Sw
AEnvLFOTrig Sw
0–127
OFF, ON
-63–+63 Finely adjusts the depth of the lter envelope.
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
to modify the cuto frequency. If this is 60, the
C4 key (middle C) is the reference key.
If this is “ON,” the phase of the VA waveform is
inverted.
If this is “ON,” the pitch envelope is cyclically
retriggered by LFO1.
* This is eective when Env Mode is SUSTAIN.
If this is “ON,” the lter envelope is cyclically
triggered by LFO1.
* This is eective when Env Mode is SUSTAIN.
If this is “ON,” the amp envelope is cyclically
triggered by LFO1.
* This is eective when Env Mode is SUSTAIN.
28
Page 29
Tone Parameters
1 2
5 6
3 4
7 8 9 10
11
15
12 13 14
16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35
36
Note on
high (more)
low (less)
Pitch
Cuto Frequency
Level
Pan
Delay
Time
Fade Time
Depth
high (more)
low (less)
Pitch
Cuto Frequency
Level
Pan
Note on
Delay Time
Fade Time
Depth
high (more)
low (less)
Delay
Time
Fade Time
Depth
Note
o
Note
on
Pitch
Cuto Frequency
Level
Pan
Step curve types
Step Curve 0
Step Curve 1–6
Step Curve 7–10
(variations of square wave)
(variations of ascending saw)
Step Curve 28–31
(variations of descending charging curve)
Step Curve 32–36 (other variations)
How to Apply the LFO
Apply the LFO gradually after the key is pressed
Fade Mod (Fade Mode): ON-IN
Step Curve 11–15
Step Curve 16–19
Step Curve 20–23
(variations of descending saw)
Apply the LFO immediately when the key is pressed, and then gradually begin to decrease the eect
Fade Mod (Fade Mode): ON-OUT
(variations of ascending exponential)
Apply the LFO gradually after the key is released
Fade Mod (Fade Mode): OFF-IN
(variations of descending exponential)
Step Curve 24–27
(variations of ascending charging curve)
29
Page 30
Tone Parameters
Note on
high (more)
low (less)
Delay
Time
Fade Time
Depth
Note o
Pitch
Cuto Frequency
Level
Pan
Apply the LFO from when the key is pressed until it is re­leased, and gradually begin to decrease the eect when the key is released
Fade Mod (Fade Mode): OFF-OUT
List of supported CCs
Parameter PARTIAL 1 PARTIAL 2 PARTIAL 3 PARTIAL 4
Tone PTL
Level
Fine Tune
Cuto
Resonance
Filter Env
Filtr Depth
Filtr Time1
Filtr Time4
Amp Env
Amp Time1
Amp Time4
LFO1
L1 Rate
L1 Pit Depth
L1 Amp Depth
L1 Flt Depth
LFO2
L2 Rate
L2 Pit Depth
16 17 18 19
21 31 35 46
3 54 55 56
9 57 58 59
81 63 79 80
83 82 85 87
86 102 103 104
89 108 109 111
90 112 114 117
29 20 22 23
26 47 48 50
30 105 106 107
28 60 61 62
14 24 25 27
15 51 52 53

TONE RD SYMPATHETIC RESO Parameter

These parameters adjust the resonance (sympathetic resonance) that occurs when you hold down the damper pedal. On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal allows strings other than those that you play to resonate sympathetically with the played strings, creating a richly expansive resonance. This eect simulates that behavior.
* MODEL RD can be selected for any of the parts. However, when the RD models
are selected only for part 1, the MFX uses the sympathetic resonance effect. The normal MFX is applied when parts 2–4 are selected.
Parameter Value Explanation
SYMPATHETIC RESO
SymReso Switch
SymReso Depth
Cabinet Reso
OFF, ON With the ON setting, the eect is applied.
0–127 Eect depth
0–127
Depth of the resonance when the damper pedal is not pressed.
30
Page 31

System Parameters

System Parameters

Parameter Value Explanation
AGING
Species whether the character of the sound (pitch variance) change s according to the varying internal temperature of this unit. This has an eect only on analog synthesizer models. The internal temperature value is shown in the upper right of the top screen of the scene.
The character of the sound is not aected by the temperature. Nor is there a temperature indication in the SCENE screen.
The internal temperature starts at the value specied by Aging Init Temp, and changes to the actual temperature (REAL). Although it depends on the temperature dierence, the REAL temperature is reached in approximately ten minutes. After reaching the REAL temperature, the setting follows the actual temperature change.
The internal temperature starts at the value specied
by Aging Init Temp, and then quickly (in approximately ten seconds) changes to the actual temperature (REAL) when you play the keyboard. After reaching the REAL temperature, the setting follows the actual temperature change.
The internal temperature is xed at the value specied by Aging Init Temp, and the character of the sound is maintained at that point.
The internal temperature that is actually measured will be the initial temperature.
Virtually species the initial internal temperature (Centigrade/Fahrenheit).
Simulates the aging of an analog synthesizer’s internal components. Increasing this value changes the sound as it would be on a unit that is a corresponding number of years old. This is valid only for sounds of an analog synthesizer model.
Adjusts the overall tuning. The displayed value is the frequency of the A4 key (middle A).
Species whether the scene’s SCALE TUNE setting is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
Adjusts the audio input level of the USB COMPUTER port.
Adjusts the audio output level to the USB COMPUTER port.
Adjusts the input level of the AUX IN jack and Bluetooth input.
Species whether the audio input of the USB COMPUTER port is mixed into the audio output of the USB COMPUTER port. If you don’t want to output this audio, turn this “OFF.”
* If you turn this “ON,” make settings on the connected
equipment so that the audio does not loop back.
Species whether the input of the AUX IN jack is mixed into the audio output of the USB COMPUTER port. If you don’t want to output this audio, turn this “OFF.”
Species whether sound is output from the speakers. The AUTO setting operates as “OFF” when headphones are connected and as “ON” when headphones are not connected.
Species whether the unit will turn o automatically after a certain time has elapsed. If you don’t want the unit to turn o automatically, choose “OFF” setting.
When the JUNO-X is operating, you can make the LEDs remain dimly lit when o instead of going completely dark. This setting adjusts the LED brightness when dimly lit.
Warm-Up
Init Temp
Age
GENERAL
MasterTune
MasKeyShift
ScaleTuneSw
USB In Lev
USB Out Lev
AuxIn/BT InLev
USB Audio Thru
AUXIN USB Thru
LineOut Gain
Speaker Sw
SPOut Gain
Auto O
LED On Bright
LED OBright
OFF
ON
FAST
FIXED
Species the initial internal temperature for Warm-Up.
REAL
0–60 [°C]/ 32–140 [°F]
OFF, 1–100 [years]
415.3–466.2
-24–+24 Shifts the overall pitch range in semitone steps.
OFF, ON
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
-12–+12 [dB] Adjusts the output gain of OUTPUT/PHONES.
OFF, ON, AUTO
-12–0 [dB] Adjusts the output gain of the speakers.
OFF, 30, 240 (min)
0–31 Adjusts the brightness when the LEDs are lit.
0–30
Parameter Value Explanation
LCD Contrast
Scene Lock
Startup Scene
1–10 Adjusts the contrast of the display.
Species whether a conrmation screen appears when you recall a scene.
OFF The scene is recalled immediately.
ON
01-01–16-16
Before the scene is recalled, a conrmation screen appears. To recall the scene, use the [Í][Ë] buttons to select “Yes,” and then press the [ENTER] (INIT)button.
Species the scene that is recalled when the unit starts up.
ARPEGGIO
Set Tone
Set DrumKit
Set Tempo
Arp Sync
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Species the synchronization setting for arpeggio performance when connected to an external device and playing in synchronization.
* This is only enabled when Sync Mode is set to “MIDI,” “USB COM” or “USB MEM.”
OFF
BEAT
MEASURE
Species whether the current sound settings are kept while only the phrase is switched (OFF) or both the phrase and the sound settings are switched (ON).
Species whether the current sound settings are kept while only the rhythm is switched (OFF) or both the rhythm and the sound settings are switched (ON).
Species whether the current tempo setting is kept while only the rhythm is switched (OFF) or both the rhythm and the tempo settings are switched (ON).
Does not synchronize to measures or beats. Arpeggio performance starts at the moment that MIDI messages are received.
Synchronizes to beats. Arpeggio performance starts at the next beat after MIDI messages are received.
Synchronizes to measures. Arpeggio performance starts at the rst beat of the next measure after MIDI messages are received.
TEMPO/SYNC
Tempo
Tempo Src
Sync Mode
Sync Out
20.00–300.00
SCENE, SYS
AUTO, INT, MIDI, USB COM, USB MEM
OFF, MIDI, USB COM, MIDI/USBCM, USB MEM, ALL
Species the system tempo. Hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the [- VALUE + ] knob to change the value in steps of 0.01.
When you switch scenes, this setting species whether to use the system tempo (SYS) or the tempo stored in the scene (SCENE).
Species the synchronization signal according to which the JUNO-X operates.
Species the connector from which MIDI clock messages etc. are output.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Sw
Pairing
Bluetooth ID
OFF, ON
- Executing pairing for Bluetooth audio.
OFF, 1–9
Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) Bluetooth communication.
Species the number added to the end of this unit’s device name shown in a Bluetooth-connected app.
MIDI
Species the MIDI receive channel on which MIDI messages (program change and bank select) from
Ctrl Ch
Ctrl Src Sel
SysCtrlSrc1–4
Soft Thru
USB-MIDIThru
USB Driver
1–16, OFF
SYS SysCtrlSrc1–4 are used for tone control.
SCENE
OFF, CC01– CC31, CC33– CC95, BEND, AFT
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
GENERIC, VENDOR
an external MIDI device can be received to switch programs. If you don’t want programs to be switched from a connected MIDI device, turn this “OFF.”
The scene’s CtrlSrc1–4 settings are used for tone control.
Specify the MIDI messages that will be used as system controls.
If this is “ON,” MIDI messages that are input from the MIDI IN connector are re-transmitted without change from the MIDI OUT connector.
Species whether MIDI messages received at the USB COMPUTER port/MIDI IN connector are retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT connector/USB COMPUTER port (ON) or are not retransmitted (OFF).
Species the USB driver setting.
31
Page 32
System Parameters
Parameter Value Explanation
Sets which connector is used for input when you use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the keyboard of the JUNO-X. In this case, the MIDI transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard does not matter. Normally you will leave this “OFF.”
Turns on/o the connection between the controllers section (keyboard, panel buttons and sliders, pedals, etc.) and the internal sound engine.
When transmitting and receiving system exclusive messages, the device ID numbers of both devices must match.
Sets whether control change messages (CC) for the tone parameters are transmitted/received (ON) or not (OFF).
Remote Kbd
Local Sw
Device ID
Tone CC Map
OFF, MIDI IN, USB COM, USB MEM
OFF, ON
17–32
OFF, ON
MIDI Tx
Tx PC
Tx Bank
Tx Edit
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Species whether program change messages will be transmitted (ON) or not be transmitted (OFF).
Species whether bank select messages will be transmitted (ON) or not be transmitted (OFF).
Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a program will be transmitted as system exclusive messages (ON), or will not be transmitted (OFF).
MIDI Rx
Rx PC
Rx Bank
Rx Exclusive
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Species whether program change messages will be received (ON) or not be received (OFF).
Species whether bank select messages will be received (ON) or not be received (OFF).
Species whether system exclusive messages will be received (ON) or not be received (OFF).
MIC IN
Mic In Gain
Mic Power
NS Switch
NS Threshold
NS Release
CompSwitch
CompAttack
CompRelease
CompThreshold
CompRatio
CompKnee
CompOutGain
Dly Send Lev
Rev Send Lev
Cho Send Lev
Mic Thru
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] Adjusts the input level of the MIC IN connector.
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
-96–0 [dB]
0–127
OFF, ON
0.1–100 [ms]
10–1000 [ms]
-60–0 [dB]
1: 1, 2: 1, 3: 1, 4: 1, 8: 1, 16: 1, 32: 1, INF: 1
0–30 [dB]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] Species the output volume of the mic compressor.
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
If this is “ON,” plug-in power (5 V) is supplied to the MIC IN connector.
Switches the noise suppressor on/o. The noise suppressor is a function that suppresses noise during periods of silence.
Adjusts the volume at which noise suppression starts to be applied.
Adjusts the time from when noise suppression starts until the volume reaches “0.”
Species whether the mic compressor (a compressor applied to the mic input) is used (ON) or not used (OFF).
Species the time from when the input to the mic compressor exceeds the CompThreshold level until the volume is compressed.
Species the time from when the input to the mic compressor falls below the CompThreshold level until compression is no longer applied.
Species the level at which the mic compressor starts applying compression.
Species the compression ratio for the mic compressor.
Smooths the transition until the mic compressor starts to be applied. Higher values produce a smoother transition.
Species the amount of delay that is applied to the mic input.
Species the amount of reverb that is applied to the mic input.
Species the amount of chorus that is applied to the mic input.
If you want the mic to be cut when the vocoder is o, turn this “OFF.”
Parameter Value Explanation
CONTROLLER
Velocity
Velo Crv
Velo Oset
Knob Mode
Aft Sens
REAL, 1–127
LIGHT, MEDIUM, HEAVY
-10–+9 Adjusts the keyboard velocity curve.
DIRECT, CATCH
0–100 Species the sensitivity of aftertouch.
Species the velocity value that is transmitted when you play the keyboard.
Species the keyboard touch.
Species whether the parameter value corresponding to a controller is immediately updated when you operate that controller (DIRECT) or only after the controller reaches the same position as the parameter’s current value (CATCH).
BUTTON Func
Source
S1 Func
S1 Mode
S2 Func
S2 Mode
S3 Func
S3 Mode
SCENE, SYS
For the values, refer to assignable list (p. 33).
LATCH, MOMENTARY
For the values, refer to assignable list (p. 33).
LATCH, MOMENTARY
For the values, refer to assignable list (p. 33).
LATCH, MOMENTARY
Species whether the functions assigned to these buttons follows the settings of the currently selected scene (SCENE) or the system settings (SYS).
Species the function assigned to the S1 button.
Species how the button operates.
Species the function assigned to the S2 button.
Species how the button operates.
Species the function assigned to the S3 button.
Species how the button operates.
SLIDER Func
SL1 Source
SL1
SL2 Source
SL2
SCENE, SYS
For the values, refer to assignable list (p. 33).
SCENE, SYS
For the values, refer to assignable list (p. 33).
Species whether the function assigned to the SL1 slider follows the setting of the currently selected scene (SCENE) or the system setting (SYS).
Species the function assigned to the SL1 slider.
Species whether the function assigned to the SL2 slider follows the setting of the currently selected scene (SCENE) or the system setting (SYS).
Species the function assigned to the SL2 slider.
PEDAL Func
Species whether the function assigned to the pedal
Hold Source
Hold
Hold Pole
Ctrl Source
Ctrl
SCENE, SYS
For the values, refer to assignable list (p. 33).
STANDARD, REVERSE
SCENE, SYS
For the values, refer to assignable list (p. 33).
connected to the HOLD jack follows the setting of the currently selected scene (SCENE) or the system setting (SYS).
Species the function assigned to the pedal connected to the HOLD jack.
Species the polarity of the pedal connected to the HOLD jack.
Species whether the function assigned to the pedal connected to the CTRL jack follows the setting of the currently selected scene (SCENE) or the system setting (SYS).
Species the function assigned to the pedal connected to the CTRL jack.
32
Page 33
System Parameters
Parameter Value Explanation
PART Btn Asgn
Assign the functions of the [4]–[8], [9]–[13] buttons and their functions when pressed while holding down the [SHIFT] button.
No Assign No assignment.
Species the current part operated from the panel and in the screen. The part played from the keyboard does not change.
Simultaneously operates the current part and the Keyboard SW, so that the selected part can be played from the keyboard. By pressing multiple parts simultaneously, you can turn Keyboard SW on for multiple parts.
Functions as the keyboard switch to change the part played from the keyboard.
Turns on/o the sound of each part. This is useful for DJ-like performances in which you turn each part’s sound on/o while you perform.
From the left button, turns MFX, DRIVE, DLY, REV, and CHO respectively on/o for all parameters simultaneously.
4-8 4-8+(S) 9-13 9-13+(S)
PartSel
Part+KeySw
KeySw
PartSw
ArpSw Switches whether each part is played by the arpeggio.
EfxSw
List of functions that can be assigned to the controllers
Function
OFF
CC01–31, 32 (OFF), 33–95
AFTERTOUCH
MONO/POLY
SCENE DOWN
SCENE UP
TONE DOWN
TONE UP
PANEL DEC
PANEL INC
CHO SW
REV SW
DLY SW
ARP SW
ARP HOLD
DETECT KEYS
DETECT BEAT
UNISON SW
BEND MODE
AUTO TUNING
TAP TEMPO
START/STOP
DRV SW
VOC/MIC
BEND DOWN
BEND UP
CHO LEVEL
REV LEVEL
DLY LEVEL
ARP SHUFFLE
ARP DURATION
PART FADE1
PART FADE2
LEVEL P-1
LEVEL P-2
LEVEL P-3
LEVEL P-4
LEVEL P-R
AGE
S1 Func S2 Func S3 Func
SL1 SL2
HOLD Ctrl
µ µ µ µ
µ µ µ µ
µ µ µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
µ µ
33
Page 34
System Parameters

SYSTEM EFFECT: Dly

Parameter Value Explanation
Choose “SCENE” if you want to use the delay settings that are assigned to the scene.
“SCENE EFFECT: Dly (Delay)” (p. 7)
Ø
Choose “SYS” if you want to use the delay settings that are assigned to the system. If this is set to “SYS,” you can edit the delay type and the various parameters.
Species the output level of the sound with delay applied.
Source
Switch
DlyType
Level
Rev Send
Delay Parameters
SCENE
SYS
OFF, ON Switches delay on/o.
“Delay Parameters” (p. 7)
Ø
0–127
0–127 Species the send level to reverb.
Edit the parameters of the selected delay. The available parameters dier depending on the type of chorus you selected in DlyType.
“Delay Parameters” (p. 7)
Ø

SYSTEM EFFECT: Rev

Parameter Value Explanation
Choose “SCENE” if you want to use the Reverb settings that are assigned to the scene.
“SCENE EFFECT: Rev (Reverb)” (p. 8)
Ø
Choose “SYS” if you want to use the Reverb settings that are assigned to the system. If this is set to “SYS,” you can edit the Reverb type and the various parameters.
Species the output level of the sound with reverb applied.
Source
Switch
RevType
Level
Reverb Parameters
SCENE
SYS
OFF, ON Switches the reverb on/o.
“Reverb Parameters” (p. 8)
Ø
0–127
Edit the parameters of the selected reverb type. The available parameters dier depending on the type of reverb you selected in RevType.
“Reverb Parameters” (p. 8)
Ø

SYSTEM EFFECT: Cho

Parameter Value Explanation
Choose “SCENE” if you want to use the chorus settings that are assigned to the scene.
Ø“SCENE EFFECT: Cho (Chorus)” (p. 9)
Choose “SYS” if you want to use the chorus settings that are assigned to the system. If this is set to “SYS,” you can edit the chorus type and the various parameters.
Species the output level of the sound with chorus applied.
Source
Switch
ChoType
Level
Rev Send
Chorus Parameters
SCENE
SYS
OFF, ON Switches chorus on/o.
“Chorus Parameters” (p. 9)
Ø
0–127
0–127 Species the send level to reverb.
Edit the parameters of the selected chorus. The available parameters dier depending on the type of chorus you selected in ChoType.
“Chorus Parameters” (p. 9)
Ø

SYSTEM EQ/COMP

Parameter Value Explanation
MASTER EQ
Switch
In Gain
Low Gain
Low Freq
Mid1 Gain
Mid1 Freq
Mid1 Q
Mid2 Gain
Mid2 Freq
Mid2 Q
Mid3 Gain
Mid3 Freq
Mid3 Q
High Gain
High Freq
MASTER COMP
Switch
Low Attack
Low Rels
Low Thres
Low Ratio
Low Knee
Low Gain
Mid Attack
Mid Rels
Mid Thres
Mid Ratio
Mid Knee
Mid Gain
High Attack
OFF, ON
-24–+24 [dB]
-24–+24 [dB] Gain of the low range.
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the low range.
-24–+24 [dB] Gain of the middle frequency range 1.
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the middle range 1.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0,
16.0
-24–+24 [dB] Gain of the middle frequency range 2.
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the middle range 2.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0,
16.0
-24–+24 [dB] Gain of the middle frequency range 3.
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the middle range 3.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0,
16.0
-24–+24 [dB] Gain of the high range.
20–16000 [Hz] Frequency of the high range.
OFF, ON
0.1–100 [ms]
10–1000 [ms]
-60–0 [dB]
1: 1, 2: 1, 3: 1, 4: 1, 8: 1, 16: 1, 32: 1, INF: 1
0–30 [dB]
-24–+24 [dB]
0.1–100 [ms]
10–1000 [ms]
-60–0 [dB]
1: 1, 2: 1, 3: 1, 4: 1, 8: 1, 16: 1, 32: 1, INF: 1
0–30 [dB]
-24–+24 [dB]
0.1–100 [ms]
Species whether the mastering EQ (an equalizer applied to the entire sound generator of the JUNO-X) is used (ON) or not used (OFF).
Adjusts the amount of boost/cut for the input to the EQ.
Width of the middle frequency range 1. Set a higher value to narrow the range to be aected.
Width of the middle frequency range 2. Set a higher value to narrow the range to be aected.
Width of the middle frequency range 3. Set a higher value to narrow the range to be aected.
Species whether the mastering COMP (a compressor applied to the entire sound generator of the JUNO-X) is used (ON) or not used (OFF).
Species the time from when the input exceeds Low Thres until compression is applied to the volume of the low-frequency band.
In a state when compression is already being applied, this species the time from when the input decreases below Low Thres until the low-frequency band stops being compressed.
Species the volume level at which compression starts for the low-frequency band.
Species the compression ratio for the low-frequency band.
This is a function that smooths the onset of compression from the uncompressed state; it gradually applies compression starting earlier than Low Thres. Higher values produce a smoother transition.
Species the output volume of the low-frequency band.
Species the time from when the input exceeds Mid Thres until compression is applied to the volume of the mid-frequency band.
In a state when compression is already being applied, this species the time from when the input decreases below Mid Thres until the mid-frequency band stops being compressed.
Species the volume level at which compression starts for the mid-frequency band.
Species the compression ratio for the mid-frequency band.
This is a function that smooths the onset of compression from the uncompressed state; it gradually applies compression starting earlier than Mid Thres. Higher values produce a smoother transition.
Species the output volume of the mid-frequency band.
Species the time from when the input exceeds High Thres until compression is applied to the volume of the high-frequency band.
34
Page 35
System Parameters
Parameter Value Explanation
In a state when compression is already being
High Rels
High Thres
High Ratio
High Knee
High Gain
Splt Low
Splt High
10–1000 [ms]
-60–0 [dB]
1: 1, 2: 1, 3: 1, 4: 1, 8: 1, 16: 1, 32: 1, INF: 1
0–30 [dB]
-24–+24 [dB]
16–16000 [Hz]
16–16000 [Hz]
applied, this species the time from when the input decreases below High Thres until the high-frequency band stops being compressed.
Species the volume level at which compression starts for the high-frequency band.
Species the compression ratio for the high-frequency band.
This is a function that smooths the onset of compression from the uncompressed state; it gradually applies compression starting earlier than High Thres. Higher values produce a smoother transition.
Species the output volume of the high-frequency band.
Species the frequency at which the low-frequency band (Low) and mid-frequency band (Mid) are divided.
Species the frequency at which the high-frequency band (High) and mid-frequency band (Mid) are divided.

SYSTEM COLOR SET

Parameter Value Explanation
Color Set
OFF COLOR
Arp O Scene O Part/Func O ModelBank O Sc1-8 O Sc9-16 O KeyCtrl O StepEditO Model O Categ O User O Part O Part+KeySw O KeySw O PartSw O ArpSw O EfxSw O No Assign St1-4 O St5-8 O St9-12 O St13-16 O
Arp On Scene On Part/Func On ModelBank On Sc1-8 On Sc9-16 On KeyCtrl On StepEdit On Model On Categ On User On Part On Part+KeySw On KeySw On PartSw On ArpSw On EfxSw On St1-4 On St5-8 On St9-12 On St13-16 On
1–10
O, O, O(b), Y, Y(b), W, W(b), G, G(b), B, B(b), R, R(b), V, V(b), B2, B2(b)
Saves and switches color settings for each set number.
Specify the illumination color of the button for <parameter name> O (when the corresponding button is o), <parameter name> On (when the corresponding button is on).
O: Unlit O: Orange, Y: Yellow, W: White, G: Green, B: Blue, R: Red, V: Violet, B2: Bright blue
(b) indicates blinking.

MODEL ASSIGN

Hold down the [MODEL BANK] button and press a button from [1]–[16] to display the settings screen.
Parameter Value Explanation
Species the assignment attributes.
MODEL Select models by the Mdl 1–8 parameters.
Attr
Mdl1–8
Catg1–8
(*1) OFF, Z-Core, COMMON, PR-A, PR-B, PR-C, PR-D, XV-5080, JUNO-X, JUNO-106, JUNO-60,
VOCODER, RD-PIANO, PR-X
* If an expansion is installed, “EXZ***” is shown at the end.
(*2) OFF, No Assign, Ac.Piano, Pop Piano, E.Grand Piano, E.Piano1, E.Piano2, E.Organ, Pipe
Organ, Reed Organ, Harpsichord, Clav, Celesta, Accordion, Harmonica, Bell, Mallet, Ac.Guitar, E.Guitar, Dist.Guitar, Ac.Bass, E.Bass, Synth Bass, Plucked/Stroke, Solo Strings, Ensemble Strs, Orchestral, Solo Brass, Ensemble Brass, Wind, Flute, Sax, Recorder, Vox/ Choir, Scat, Synth Lead, Synth Brass, Synth Pad/Str, Synth Bellpad, Synth PolyKey, Synth FX, Synth Seq/Pop, Phrase, Pulsating, Beat&Groove, Hit, Sound FX, Drums, Percussion, Stack, Zone, Vocoder
CATEGORY Select categories by the Catg 1–8 parameters.
No assignments are possible.
USER
model (*1)
category (*2)
* If an expansion is installed, “EXZ***” is shown after
“USER.” In this case, the expansion name is shown in 1–8.
This is shown only when Attr = MODEL. Specify the model that you want to assign.
This is shown only when Attr = CATEGORY. Specify the category name that you want to assign.
* If an expansion is installed, “EXZ On” is shown after “User On.”
35
Page 36

MFX Parameters

MFX List

00
Thru
Filter
01
Equalizer
02
Mid-Side EQ
03
Spectrum
04
Isolator
05
Low Boost
06
SuperFilter
07
MM Filter
08
Step Filter
09
Enhancer
10
Exciter
11
Auto Wah
12
Humanizer
Phaser
13
Phaser
14
Small Phaser
15
Script 90
16
Script 100
17
Step Phaser
18
M StagePhsr
19
Inf Phaser
Flanger
20
Flanger
21
SBF-325
22
StepFlanger
Chorus
23
Chorus
24
Hexa-Chorus
25
Trem Chorus
26
Space-D
(Chorus)
27
CE-1
28
SDD-320
29
JUNO Chorus
Modulation
30
Ring Mod
31
Tremolo
32
Auto Pan
33
Slicer
34
Rotary
35
VK Rotary
Drive / Amp
36
Overdrive
37
Distortion
38
T-Scream
39
Fuzz
40
Fattener
41
HMS Distort
42
Saturator
43
W Saturator
44
Gt Amp Sim
45
EP Amp Sim
46
Speaker Sim
36
(Mid-Side Equalizer)
(Multi-mode Filter)
(Multi Stage Phaser)
(Innite Phaser)
(Flanger)
(Tremolo Chorus)
(DIMENSION D)
(JUNO-106 Chorus)
(Ring modulator)
(Tone Fattener)
(HMS Distortion)
(Worm Saturator)
(Guitar Amp Simulator)
(RD EP Amp Simulator)
(Speaker Simulater)
Comp / Limiter
47
page
37
page
37
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
37
38
38
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
43
44
44
44
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
47
47
47
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
51
51
52
Compressor
48
M/S Comp
49
Limiter
50
Sustainer
51
Transient
52
Gate
Delay
53
Delay
54
Mod Delay
55
2Tap PanDly
56
3Tap PanDly
57
4Tap PanDly
58
MultiTapDly
59
Reverse Dly
60
TimeCtrlDly
61
Tape Echo
62
M/S Delay
Looper
63
DJFX Looper
64
BPM Looper
Lo-
65
LOFI Comp
66
Bit Crusher
67
Phonograph
Pitch
68
PitchShiftr
69
2V PShifter
Combination
70
OD Ó Chorus
71
OD Ó Flanger
72
OD Ó Delay
73
DS Ó Chorus
74
DS Ó Flanger
75
DS Ó Delay
76
OD/DS Ó T. Wah
77
OD/DS Ó A. Wah
78
Gt Ó Chorus
79
Gt Ó Flanger
80
Gt Ó Phaser
81
Gt Ó Delay
82
EP Ó Tremolo
83
EP Ó Chorus
84
EP Ó Flanger
85
EP Ó Phaser
86
EP Ó Delay
87
Enhncr Ó Cho
88
Enhncr Ó Fl
89
Enhncr Ó Dly
90
Chorus Ó Dly
91
Flanger Ó Dly
92
Chorus Ó Fl
93
JD Multi
(Mid-Side Compressor)
(Modulation Delay)
(2 Tap Pan Delay)
(3 Tap Pan Delay)
(4 Tap Pan Delay)
(Multi Tap Delay)
(Reverse Delay)
(Time Control Delay)
(Mid-Side Delay)
(Lo-Fi Compressor)
(Pitch Shifter)
(2 Voice Pitch Shifter)
(Overdrive Ó Chorus)
(Overdrive Ó Flanger)
(Overdrive Ó Delay)
(Distortion Ó Chorus)
(Distortion Ó Flanger)
(Distortion Ó Delay)
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Chorus)
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Flanger)
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Phaser)
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Delay)
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Tremolo)
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Chorus)
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Flanger)
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Phaser)
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Delay)
(Enhancer Ó Chorus)
(Enhancer Ó Flanger)
(Enhancer Ó Delay)
(Chorus Ó Delay)
(Flanger Ó Delay)
(Chorus Ó Flanger)
(Overdrive/Distortion Ó Touch Wah)
(Overdrive/Distortion Ó Auto Wah)
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
52
52
53
53
53
53
54
54
55
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
58
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
62
62
63
64
65
66
67
67
67
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
71
Page 37
MFX Parameters
4-Band EQ4-Band EQ
4-Band EQ4-Band EQ
LR
Ò
MS
LR
Ò
MS
MS
Ò
LR
MS
Ò
LR
5-Band EQ5-Band EQ
5-Band EQ5-Band EQ

MFX Common Parameters

Parameter Value Explanation
Type
Switch
Cho Send
Rev Send
MFX parameter
Src1–4
Sens1–4
Asgn1–4
Selects the MFX type.
OFF, ON Switches the MFX on/o.
0–127
0–127
Diers depending on the MFX type.
OFF, CC01–CC31, CC33–CC95, BEND, AFT, SYS-CTRL1, SYS-CTRL2, SYS-CTRL3, SYS-CTRL4
-63–+63
Diers depending on the MFX type.
Adjusts the amount of chorus. If you don’t want to add the chorus eect, set it to “0.”
Adjusts the amount of reverb. If you don’t want to add the reverb eect, set it to “0.”
ØFor details, refer to the parameters for each MFX.
Species the MIDI message that will control the corresponding MFX CONTROL parameter.
Species the depth of MFX CONTROL. Specify a positive “+” value if you want to change the value of the assigned destination in a positive direction (larger, toward the right, faster, etc.), or specify a negative value “-” if you want to change the value in a negative direction (smaller, toward the left, slower, etc.). Larger values will allow a greater amount of control.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
00 Thru

Filter

01 Equalizer
This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, mid x 2, high).
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
20, 25, 31, 40, 50, 63,
Low Freq
Low Gain
Mid1 Freq
Mid1 Gain
Mid1 Q
Mid2 Freq
Mid2 Gain
80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400 [Hz]
-15–+15 [dB]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-15–+15 [dB] Gain of the middle range 1
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-15–+15 [dB] Gain of the middle range 2
Frequency of the low range
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Frequency of the middle range 1
Width of the middle range 1 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the middle range 2
Parameter Value Explanation
Mid2 Q
HighFreq
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000 [Hz]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Low Gain, High Gain, Level
02 Mid-Side EQ
Width of the middle range 2 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the high range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to MFX CONTROL assign 1–4.
(Mid-Side Equalizer)
This eect allows the left/right signals that have similar phase to be tonally adjusted in a dierent way than the left/right signals that have dierent phase.
L in L out
Mid
Side
Parameter Value Explanation
M EQ Switch
M In G
M Low F
M Low G
M Mid1 F
M Mid1G
M Mid1 Q
M Mid2 F
M Mid2G
M Mid2 Q
M Mid3 F
M Mid3G
M Mid3 Q
M High F
M HighG
OFF, ON
-12.00–+12.00 [dB]
20, 25, 31, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB] Gain of the middle range 1
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB] Gain of the middle range 2
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB] Gain of the middle range 3
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB]
Switches whether to apply tonal adjustment to left/right input signals whose phase is similar (in phase).
Volume of left/right input signals whose phase is similar (in phase)
Frequency of the low range
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Frequency of the middle range 1
Width of the middle range 1 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the middle range 2
Width of the middle range 2 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the middle range 3
Width of the middle range 3 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the high range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
R outR in
37
Page 38
MFX Parameters
SpectrumSpectrum
SpectrumSpectrum
IsolatorIsolator
Low BoostLow Boost
IsolatorIsolator
Low BoostLow Boost
Parameter Value Explanation
S EQ Switch
S In G
S Low F
S Low G
S Mid1 F
S Mid1G
S Mid1 Q
S Mid2 F
S Mid2G
S Mid2 Q
S Mid3 F
S Mid3G
S Mid3 Q
S High F
S HighG
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
-12.00–+12.00 [dB]
20, 25, 31, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB] Gain of the middle range 1
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB] Gain of the middle range 2
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB] Gain of the middle range 3
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000 [Hz]
-12.00–+12.00 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, M Low Gain, M Mid1 Gain, M Mid2 Gain, M Mid3 Gain, M High Gain, S Low Gain, S Mid1 Gain, S Mid2 Gain, S Mid3 Gain, S High Gain
Switches whether to apply tonal adjustment to left/right input signals whose phase is distant (opposite phase).
Volume of left/right signals whose phase is distant (opposite phase)
Frequency of the low range
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Frequency of the middle range 1
Width of the middle range 1 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the middle range 2
Width of the middle range 2 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the middle range 3
Width of the middle range 3 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be aected.
Frequency of the high range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
03 Spectrum
This is a stereo spectrum. Spectrum is a type of lter which modies the timbre by boosting or cutting the level at specic frequencies.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Band1
Band2
Band3
Band4
Band5
Band6
Band7
Band8
Q
Level
Asgn1–4
-15–+15 [dB] Gain of each frequency band
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Level
Simultaneously adjusts the width of the adjusted ranges for all the frequency bands.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
04 Isolator
This is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly, allowing you to add a special eect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying ranges.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Low Level
Mid Level
High Level
Low AP Sw
Low AP Lv
Mid AP Sw
Mid AP Lv
Boost Sw
Boost Lv
Level
Asgn1–4
-60–+4 [dB] These boost and cut each of the High, Middle,
-60–+4 [dB]
-60–+4 [dB]
OFF, ON
0–127
OFF, ON
0–127
OFF, ON
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Low Level, Mid Level, High Level
and Low frequency ranges. At -60 dB, the sound becomes inaudible. 0 dB is equivalent to the input level of the sound.
Turns the Anti-Phase function on and o for the Low frequency ranges. When turned on, the counter-channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal.
Adjusts the level settings for the Low frequency ranges. Adjusting this level for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specic parts (This is eective only for stereo source.).
Settings of the Anti-Phase function for the Middle frequency ranges. The parameters are the same as for the Low frequency ranges.
Turns Low Booster on/o. This emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass sound.
Increasing this value gives you a heavier low end. Depending on the Isolator and lter settings this eect may be hard to distinguish.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
38
Page 39
MFX Parameters
Low BoostLow Boost
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Low BoostLow Boost
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Super FilterSuper Filter
Super FilterSuper Filter
Multimode
Filter
Multimode
Filter
Multimode
Filter
Multimode
Filter
Step FilterStep Filter
Step FilterStep Filter
05 Low Boost
Boosts the volume of the lower range, creating powerful lows.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Boost Freq
Boost Gain
Boost Wid
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
50, 56, 63, 71, 80, 90, 100, 112, 125 [Hz]
0–+12 [dB]
WIDE, MID, NARROW Width of the lower range that will be boosted
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Boost Freq, Boost Gain
Center frequency at which the lower range will be boosted
Center frequency at which the lower range will be boosted
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
06 SuperFilter
This is a lter with an extremely sharp slope. The cuto frequency can be varied cyclically.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Filter type Frequency range that will pass through each lter
Type
Slope
Cuto
Resonance
Gain
Mod Sw
Mod Wave
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
LPF, BPF, HPF, NOTCH
-12, -24, -36 [dB]
0–127
0–100
0–+12 [dB] Amount of boost for the lter output
OFF, ON On/o switch for cyclic change
TRI, SQR, SIN, SAW1, SAW2
SAW1 SAW2
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
LPF: Frequencies below the cuto BPF: Frequencies in the region of the cuto HPF: Frequencies above the cuto
NOTCH: Frequencies other than the region of the cuto
Amount of attenuation per octave
-12 dB: Gentle
-24 dB: Steep
-36 dB: Extremely steep
Cuto frequency of the lter Increasing this value will raise the cuto frequency.
Filter resonance level Increasing this value will emphasize the region near the cuto frequency.
How the cuto frequency will be modulated
TRI: Triangle wave SQR: Square wave SIN: Sine wave SAW1: Sawtooth wave (upward) SAW2: Sawtooth wave (downward)
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Parameter Value Explanation
Depth
Attack
Level
Asgn1–4
07 MM Filter
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Cuto, Resonance, Rate, Attack
Speed at which the cuto frequency will change This is eective if Mod Wave is SQR, SAW1, or SAW2.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Multi-mode Filter)
This is a lter that is adjusted for eective use in a DJ performance.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of lter
LPF/HPF: The lter type is automatically
switched according to the Filter Tone parameter value.
Filter resonance level Higher values more strongly emphasize the region of the operating frequency.
Amount of attenuation per octave
-12 dB: gentle
-24 dB: steep
-36 dB: extremely steep
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Type
Tone
Color
Slope
Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
LPF/HPF, LPF, HPF, BPF
0–255 Frequency at which the lter operates
0–255
-12, -24, -36 [dB]
0–+12 [dB] Amount of boost for the lter output
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Filter Type, Filter Tone, Filter Color, Filter Slope
08 Step Filter
This is a lter whose cuto frequency can be modulated in steps. You can specify the pattern by which the cuto frequency will change.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Step 1–16
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Attack
Type
0–127 Cuto frequency at each step
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127
LPF, BPF, HPF, NOTCH
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Speed at which the cuto frequency changes between steps
Filter type Frequency range that will pass through each lter
LPF: Frequencies below the cuto BPF: Frequencies in the region of the cuto HPF: Frequencies above the cuto NOTCH: Frequencies other than the region of
the cuto
39
Page 40
MFX Parameters
EnhancerEnhancer
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
EnhancerEnhancer
Auto WahAuto Wah
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Auto WahAuto Wah
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
FormantFormant
OverdriveOverdrive
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Parameter Value Explanation
Amount of attenuation per octave
Slope
Reso
Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
-12, -24, -36 [dB]
0–127
0–+12 [dB] Amount of boost for the lter output
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate, Attack, Resonance
-12 dB: Gentle
-24 dB: Steep
-36 dB: Extremely steep
Filter resonance level Increasing this value will emphasize the region near the cuto frequency.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
09 Enhancer
Controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies, adding sparkle and tightness to the sound.
L in L out
Mix
R outR in
Mix
Parameter Value Explanation
Sens
Mix
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127 Sensitivity of the enhancer
0–127
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Sens, Mix
Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
10 Exciter
This adds dynamics to the sound, by dynamically bringing up the high end using a split-band compressor.
L in
Channel Divider
Low
Mid
High
Compressor
Compressor
L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Split2 Freq
Level
Asgn1–4
3000–10000 (Hz)
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Band2 Thrs, Band2 Gain, Band3 Thrs, Band3 Gain
Frequency at which the midrange and high-end frequencies are split
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
11 Auto Wah
Cyclically controls a lter to create cyclic change in timbre.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Filter type
Mode
Manual
Peak
Sens
Polarity
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Phase
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
LPF, BPF
0–127
0–127
0–127 Sensitivity with which the lter is modied
UP, DOWN
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth at which the wah eect is modulated
0–180 [deg]
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Manual, Sens, Rate (Hz), Depth, Phase
LPF: The wah eect will be applied over a wide
frequency range.
BPF: The wah eect will be applied over a
narrow frequency range.
Center frequency at which the wah eect is applied
Width of the frequency region at which the wah eect is applied Increasing this value will make the frequency region narrower.
Direction in which the lter will move
UP: The lter will change toward a higher
frequency.
DOWN: The lter will change toward a lower
frequency.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation of wah eect
Adjusts the degree of phase shift of the left and right sounds when the wah eect is applied.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
R in
Channel Divider
Parameter Value Explanation
Band2 Threshold
Band2 Gain
Band3 Threshold
Band3 Gain
Split1 Freq
-80.0–0.0 (dB)
0–+24 (dB)
-80.0–0.0 (dB)
0–+24 (dB)
2000–5000 (Hz)
Low
Mid
High
Compressor
Compressor
Raises the midrange frequency levels when they fall below the specied amount.
Sets how much to raise the levels when the midrange volume is low.
Raises the high-end frequency levels when they fall below the specied amount.
Sets how much to raise the levels when the high-end frequency volume is low.
Frequency at which the low and midrange frequencies are split
40
R out
12 Humanizer
Adds a vowel character to the sound, making it similar to a human voice.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Drive Sw
Drive
OFF, ON Overdrive on/o
0–127
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
L out
Pan L
Pan R
R out
Page 41
MFX Parameters
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
PhaserPhaser
PhaserPhaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
PhaserPhaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
PhaserPhaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
PhaserPhaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
PhaserPhaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Parameter Value Explanation
Vowel1
Vowel2
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
In Sync Sw
InSyncThres
Manual
Low Gain
High Gain
Pan
Level
Asgn1–4
a, e, i, o, u
a, e, i, o, u
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Eect depth
OFF, ON
0–127 Volume level at which reset is applied
0–100
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
L64–63R Stereo location of the output sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Drive, Rate (Hz), Depth, Manual, Pan
Selects the vowel.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency at which the two vowels switch
LFO reset on/o Determines whether the LFO for switching the vowels is reset by the input signal (ON) or not (OFF).
Point at which Vowel 1/2 switch
0–49: Vowel 1 will have a longer duration. 50: Vowel 1 and 2 will be of equal duration. 51–100: Vowel 2 will have a longer duration.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.

Phaser

Parameter Value Explanation
Feedback
Mix
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
-98–+98 [%]
0–127 Level of the phase-shifted sound
-15–+15 [dB] Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
-15–+15 [dB] Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Manual, Rate (Hz), Resonance
Adjusts the proportion of the phaser sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
14 Small Phaser
This simulates an analog phaser of the past.
It is particularly suitable for electric piano.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Rate
Color
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
0–100 Frequency of modulation
1, 2 Modulation character
-15–+15 [dB] Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
-15–+15 [dB] Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
R outR in
13 Phaser
This is a stereo phaser. A phase-shifted sound is added to the original sound and modulated.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
Manual
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Polarity
Resonance
4-STAGE, 8-STAGE, 12-STAGE
0–127
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø “Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
INVERSE, SYNCHRO
0–127 Amount of feedback
Mix
R outR in
Mix
Number of stages in the phaser
Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite.
INVERSE: The left and right phase will be
opposite. When using a mono source, this spreads the sound.
SYNCHRO: The left and right phase will be the
same. Select this when inputting a stereo source.
15 Script 90
This simulates a dierent analog phaser than Small Phaser.
It is particularly suitable for electric piano.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Speed
Depth
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
0–100 Speed of modulation
0–127 Depth of modulation
-15–+15 [dB] Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
-15–+15 [dB] Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Speed
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
41
Page 42
MFX Parameters
PhaserPhaser
PhaserPhaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Step PhaserStep Phaser
Step PhaserStep Phaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Multi Stage
Phaser
Multi Stage
Phaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
16 Script 100
This simulates an analog phaser of the past.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Duty
Min
Max
Manual Sw
Manual
Resonance
Mix
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-50–50
0–100 Lower limit reached by modulation
0–100 Upper limit reached by modulation
OFF, ON
0–100
0–66 Amount of feedback
0–127 Level of the phase-shifted sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Min, Max, Manual, Resonance, Mix
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the ratio of speeds at which the modulation rises or falls.
Applies modulation according to the value of the Manual parameter, rather than modulating automatically.
Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
17 Step Phaser
This is a stereo phaser. The phaser eect will be varied gradually.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
Manual
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Polarity
Resonance
Feedback
4-STAGE, 8-STAGE, 12-STAGE
0–127
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
INVERSE, SYNCHRO
0–127 Amount of feedback
-98–+98 [%]
Mix
Mix
Number of stages in the phaser
Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite.
INVERSE: The left and right phase will be
opposite. When using a mono source, this spreads the sound.
SYNCHRO: The left and right phase will be the
same. Select this when inputting a stereo source.
Adjusts the proportion of the phaser sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Parameter Value Explanation
S Rate Sync
S. Rate
S. Rate Nt
Mix
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
0.10–20.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Level of the phase-shifted sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Manual, Rate, Resonance, S. Rate, Mix
18 M StagePhsr
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Rate of the step-wise change in the phaser eect
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Multi Stage Phaser)
Extremely high settings of the phase dierence produce a deep phaser eect.
L in
R in
Mix
Parameter Value Explanation
4-STAGE, 8-STAGE,
Mode
Manual
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
R outR in
Resonance
Mix
Pan
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
12-STAGE, 16-STAGE, 20-STAGE, 24-STAGE
0–127
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–127 Amount of feedback
0–127 Level of the phase-shifted sound
L64–63R Stereo location of the output sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Manual, Rate (Hz), Resonance, Mix, Pan
Number of stages in the phaser
Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
Pan L
Pan R
R out
42
Page 43
MFX Parameters
Innite
Phaser
Innite
Phaser
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
FlangerFlanger
FlangerFlanger
19 Inf Phaser
(Innite Phaser)
A phaser that continues raising/lowering the frequency at which the sound is modulated.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
Speed
Resonance
Mix
Pan
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
1–4
-100–+100
0–127 Amount of feedback
0–127 Level of the phase-shifted sound
L64–63R Stereo location of the output sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Speed, Resonance, Mix, Pan
Higher values will produce a deeper phaser eect.
Speed at which to raise or lower the frequency at which the sound is modulated (+: upward / -: downward)
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
Pan L
Pan R
R out

Flanger

20 Flanger
This is a stereo anger (The LFO has the same phase for left and right.).
It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking o or landing.
A lter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the anged sound.
Balance D
L in
Feedback
Feedback
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Filter type
OFF: No lter is used
Type
Cuto
Pre Delay
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Phase
Feedback
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, LPF, HPF
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–180 [deg] Spatial spread of the sound
-98–+98 [%]
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Feedback, Balance
LPF: Cuts the frequency range above the Cuto
Freq
HPF: Cuts the frequency range below the
Cuto Freq
Basic frequency of the lter
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the anger sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Balance W
Balance W
L out
R out
43
Page 44
MFX Parameters
SBF-325SBF-325
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Step FlangerStep Flanger
Step FlangerStep Flanger
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
ChorusChorus
ChorusChorus
21 SBF-325
(Flanger)
This eect reproduces Roland’s SBF-325 analog anger.
It provides three types of anging eect (which adds a metallic resonance to the original sound) and a chorus-type eect.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Types of anging eect
FL1 A typical mono anger
Mode
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Manual
Feedback
RMod Phase
L Phase
R Phase
Level
Asgn1–4
FL2
FL3
CHO A chorus eect
OFF, ON
0.02–5.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Modulation depth of the anger eect
0–127
0–127
NORM, INV
NORM, INV
NORM, INV
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Depth, Manual
A stereo anger that preserves the stereo positioning of the original sound
A cross-mix anger that produces a more intense eect
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Modulation frequency of the anger eect
Center frequency at which the anger eect is applied
Amount by which the anging eect is boosted If Mode is CHO, this setting is ignored.
Phase of the right channel modulation: Normally, you will leave this at Normal (NORM). If you specify Inverted (INV), the modulation (upward/downward movement) of the right channel is inverted.
Phase when mixing the anging sound with the original sound
NORM: normal phase INV: inverse phase
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Parameter Value Explanation
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000,
Cuto
Pre Delay
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Phase
Feedback
S. Rate Sync
S. Rate
S. Rate Nt
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–180 [deg] Spatial spread of the sound
-98–+98 [%]
OFF, ON
0.10–20.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate, Feedback, S. Rate, Balance
Basic frequency of the lter
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Rate (period) of pitch change
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the anger sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.

Chorus

22 StepFlanger
This is a anger in which the anger pitch changes in steps.
The speed at which the pitch changes can also be specied in terms of a note-value of a specied tempo.
Balance D
L in
Feedback
Feedback
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Filter type
OFF: No lter is used
Type
OFF, LPF, HPF
LPF: Cuts the frequency range above the Cuto
Freq
HPF: Cuts the frequency range below the Cuto
Freq
Balance W
Balance W
L out
R out
23 Chorus
This is a stereo chorus. A lter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound.
Balance D
L in
Balance W
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Filter type
OFF: No lter is used
Type
Cuto
Pre Delay
OFF, LPF, HPF
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 [Hz]
0.0–100 [ms]
LPF: Cuts the frequency range above the Cuto
Freq
HPF: Cuts the frequency range below the Cuto
Freq
Basic frequency of the lter
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
L out
R out
44
Page 45
MFX Parameters
Hexa ChorusHexa Chorus
Tremolo
Chorus
Tremolo
Chorus
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Space DSpace D
Space DSpace D
Parameter Value Explanation
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Phase
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–180 [deg] Spatial spread of the sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Balance
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the chorus sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
24 Hexa-Chorus
Uses a six-phase chorus (six layers of chorused sound) to give richness and spatial spread to the sound.
Balance D
L in
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Delay 0.0–100 [ms]
Rate Sync OFF, ON
Rate 0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Rate Note
Depth 0–127 Depth of modulation
PreDly Dev 0–20
Depth Dev -20–+20
Pan Dev 0–20
Balance D100: 0W–D0: 100W
Level 0–127 Output Level
Asgn1–4
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, Rate (Hz), Balance
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the dierences in Pre Delay between each chorus sound.
Adjusts the dierence in modulation depth between each chorus sound.
Adjusts the dierence in stereo location between each chorus sound.
0: All chorus sounds will be in the center. 20: Each chorus sound will be spaced at 60
degree intervals relative to the center.
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the chorus sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
25 Trem Chorus
(Tremolo Chorus)
This is a chorus eect with added Tremolo (cyclic modulation of volume).
Balance D
L in
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Delay
Cho Sync
C. Rate
C. Rate Nt
Cho Depth
Trm Sync
T. Rate
T. Rate Nt
Trm Separate
Trm Phase
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Modulation depth of the chorus eect
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of the tremolo eect
0–180 [deg] Spread of the tremolo eect
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, C. Rate, T. Rate, Balance
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Modulation frequency of the chorus eect
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Modulation frequency of the tremolo eect
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the tremolo chorus sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
26 Space-D
This is a multiple chorus that applies two-phase modulation in stereo. It gives no impression of modulation, but produces a transparent chorus eect.
Balance D
L in
Balance W
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Delay
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Phase
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–180 [deg] Spatial spread of the sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the chorus sound (W)
L out
R out
45
Page 46
MFX Parameters
CE-1CE-1
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
SDD-320SDD-320
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
ChorusChorus
Noise Gener-
ator
Noise Gener-
ator
Ring ModRing Mod
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Ring ModRing Mod
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Parameter Value Explanation
Level
Asgn1–4
27 CE-1
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Balance
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Chorus)
This models the classic BOSS CE-1 chorus eect unit.
It provides a chorus sound with a distinctively analog warmth.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Intensity
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127 Chorus depth
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Intensity
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
29 JUNO Chorus
(JUNO-106 Chorus)
This models the chorus eects of the Roland JUNO-106.
Balance D
L in
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
Noise Lv
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
I, II, I+II, JX I, JX II, III, I+III, II+III, I+II+III
0–127 Volume of the noise produced by chorus
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Noise Level, Balance
Type of Chorus
I+II, I+III, II+III, I+II+III: The state in which
multiple buttons are pressed at the same time.
Volume balance between the dry sound (D) and eect sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
28 SDD-320
(DIMENSION D)
This models Roland’s DIMENSION D (SDD-320). It provides a clear chorus sound.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
1, 2, 3, 4, 1+4, 2+4, 3+4
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Mode
Switches the mode.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.

Modulation

30 Ring Mod
This is an eect that applies amplitude modulation (AM) to the input signal, producing bell-like sounds. You can also change the modulation frequency in response to changes in the volume of the sound sent into the eect.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Frequency
Sens
Polarity
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
0–127
UP, DOWN
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Frequency, Sens, Balance
(Ring modulator)
R outR in
Adjusts the frequency at which modulation is applied.
Adjusts the amount of frequency modulation applied.
Determines whether the frequency modulation moves towards higher frequencies or lower frequencies.
UP: The lter will change toward a higher
frequency.
DOWN: The lter will change toward a lower
frequency.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the eect sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
46
Page 47
MFX Parameters
TremoloTremolo
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
TremoloTremolo
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Auto PanAuto Pan
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Auto PanAuto Pan
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
SlicerSlicer
SlicerSlicer
31 Tremolo
Cyclically changes the volume.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Modulation Wave
TRI: Triangle wave SQR: Square wave SIN: Sine wave SAW1/2: Sawtooth wave TRP: Trapezoidal wave
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of the change
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Mod Wave
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
TRI, SQR, SIN, SAW1, SAW2, TRP
SAW1 SAW2
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth to which the eect is applied
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Depth
32 Auto Pan
Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Modulation Wave
TRI: Triangle wave SQR: Square wave SIN: Sine wave SAW1/2: Sawtooth wave TRP: Trapezoidal wave
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of the change
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Mod Wave
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
TRI, SQR, SIN, SAW1, SAW2, TRP
SAW1 SAW2
R R
L L
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth to which the eect is applied
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Depth
R outR in
33 Slicer
By applying successive cuts to the sound, this eect turns a conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a backing phrase. This is especially eective when applied to sustain-type sounds.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Step 1–16
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Attack
In Sync Sw
InSyncThres
0–127 Level at each step
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127
OFF, ON
0–127 Volume at which an input note will be detected
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Rate at which the 16-step sequence will cycle
Speed at which the level changes between steps
Species whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume from the rst step of the sequence (ON) or not (OFF)
47
Page 48
MFX Parameters
RotaryRotary
RotaryRotary
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Parameter Value Explanation
Sets the manner in which the volume changes as one step progresses to the next.
LEGATO: The change in volume from one
step’s level to the next remains unaltered. If the
Mode
Shue
Level
Asgn1–4
LEGATO, SLASH
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Rate (Hz), Attack, Shue
level of a following step is the same as the one preceding it, there is no change in volume.
SLASH: The level is momentarily set to 0 before
progressing to the level of the next step. This change in volume occurs even if the level of the following step is the same as the preceding step.
Timing of volume changes in levels for even-numbered steps (step 2, step 4, step 6...). The higher the value, the later the beat progresses.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
34 Rotary
This simulates a classic rotary speaker of the past.
Since the operation of the high-frequency and low-frequency rotors can be specied independently, the distinctive modulation can be reproduced realistically. This is most eective on organ patches.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of the low frequency rotor and high frequency
Speed
Wf Slow
Wf Fast
Wf Accel
Wf Level
Tw Slow
Tw Fast
Tw Accel
Tw Level
Separation
Level
Asgn1–4
SLOW, FAST
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Slow speed (SLOW) of the low frequency rotor
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Fast speed (FAST) of the low frequency rotor
0–15
0–127 Volume of the low frequency rotor
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
0–15
0–127
0–127 Spatial dispersion of the sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Speed, Level
rotor.
SLOW : Slows down the rotation to the Slow
Rate.
FAST: Speeds up the rotation to the Fast Rate.
Adjusts the time it takes the low frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow (or slow to fast) speed. Lower values will require longer times.
Settings of the high frequency rotor The parameters are the same as for the low frequency rotor
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
R out
35 VK Rotary
This type provides modied response for the rotary speaker, with the low end boosted further.
This eect features the same specications as the VK-7’s built-in rotary speaker.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Speed
Brake
Wf Slow
Wf Fast
Wf Trs Up
Wf Trs Dw
Wf Level
Tw Slow
Tw Fast
Tw Trs Up
Tw Trs Dw
Tw Level
Spread
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
OD Switch
OD Gain
OD Drive
OD Level
Asgn1–4
SLOW, FAST
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Low-speed rotation speed of the woofer
0.05–10.00 [Hz] High-speed rotation speed of the woofer
0–127
0–127
0–127 Volume of the woofer
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–10
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, ON Overdrive on/o
0–127
0–127 Degree of distortion
0–127 Volume of the overdrive
OFF, Speed, Brake, OD Gain, OD Drive, OD Level
Rotational speed of the rotating speaker
SLOW: Slow FAST: Fast
Switches the rotation of the rotary speaker. When this is turned on, the rotation will gradually stop. When it is turned o, the rotation will gradually resume.
Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Slow to Fast.
Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Fast to Slow.
Settings of the tweeter The parameters are the same as for the woofer.
Sets the rotary speaker stereo image. The higher the value set, the wider the sound is spread out.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Overdrive input level Higher values will increase the distortion.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
R out
48
Page 49
MFX Parameters
Amp Simula-
tor
Amp Simula-
tor
OverdriveOverdrive
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Amp Simula-
tor
Amp Simula-
tor
DistortionDistortion
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
DistortionDistortion
ToneTone
DistortionDistortion
ToneTone
Pre FilterPre Filter
Pre FilterPre Filter
Tone
Control
Tone
Control
Tone
Control
Tone
Control
OverdriveOverdrive
OverdriveOverdrive
Post FilterPost Filter
Post FilterPost Filter
Odd
Overtone
Generator
Odd
Overtone
Generator
Even
Overtone
Generator
Even
Overtone
Generator
Odd
Overtone
Generator
Odd
Overtone
Generator
Even
Overtone
Generator
Even
Overtone
Generator

Drive / Amp

36 Overdrive
This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Drive
Tone
Amp Switch
AmpType
Low Gain
High Gain
Pan
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
0–127 Sound quality of the Overdrive eect
OFF, ON Turns the Amp Simulator on/o.
SMALL, BUILT-IN, 2-STACK, 3-STACK
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
L64–63R Stereo location of the output sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Drive, Tone, Pan
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Type of guitar amp
SMALL: Small amp BUILT-IN: Single-unit type amp 2-STACK: Large double stack amp 3-STACK: Large triple stack amp
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
37 Distortion
Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive.
L in
R in
Pan L
Pan R
L out
R out
Pan L
Pan R
L out
R out
38 T-Scream
This models a classic analog overdrive. It is distinctive in adding an appro­priate amount of overtones without muddying the sound.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Distortion
Tone
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
0–127 Tonal character of the overdrive
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Distortion, Tone
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
39 Fuzz
Adds overtones and intensely distorts the sound.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Drive
Tone
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
0–100 Sound quality of the Overdrive eect
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Drive, Tone
40 Fattener
(Tone Fattener)
Adjusts the depth of distortion. This also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Parameter Value Explanation
Drive
Tone
Amp Switch
AmpType
Low Gain
High Gain
Pan
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
0–127 Sound quality of the Overdrive eect
OFF, ON Turns the Amp Simulator on/o.
SMALL, BUILT-IN, 2-STACK, 3-STACK
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
L64–63R Stereo location of the output sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Drive, Tone, Pan
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Type of guitar amp
SMALL: Small amp BUILT-IN: Single-unit type amp 2-STACK: Large double stack amp 3-STACK: Large triple stack amp
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
This eect applies distinctive distortion, adding overtones to give more depth to the sound.
L outL in
R inR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Odd Level
Even Level
Level
Asgn1–4
0–400 [%] Raising the value adds odd-order overtones.
0–400 [%] Raising the value adds even-order overtones.
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Odd Level, Even Level
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
49
Page 50
MFX Parameters
Tube Model
Distortion
Tube Model
Distortion
Pre FilterPre Filter
OverdriveOverdrive
Post Filter1-3Post Filter1-3
Pre FilterPre Filter
OverdriveOverdrive
Post Filter1-3Post Filter1-3
Pre FilterPre Filter
OverdriveOverdrive
Post
Filter1-3
Post
Filter1-3
Pre FilterPre Filter
Low/HighLow/High
Low/HighLow/High
OverdriveOverdrive
Post
Filter1-3
Post
Filter1-3
41 HMS Distort
(HMS Distortion)
This is a distortion-type eect that models the vacuum tube amp section of a rotary speaker of the past.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Dist
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127 Strength of distortion
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Distortion
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
R out
42 Saturator
This eect combines overdrive and lter.
Balance D
L in L out
Balance W
R outR in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of lter that precedes the distortion processing
THRU: No lter is applied LPF: A lter that passes the sound below the
Pre Type
Pre Freq
Pre Gain
Drive
Post1 Type
Post1Frq
Post1Gain
Post2 Type
Post2Frq
Post2Gain
Post3 Type
Post3Frq
Post3Gain
THRU, LPF, HPF, LSV, HSV
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] For the LSV/HSV types, the amount of boost/cut
0.0–48.0 [dB] Strength of distortion
THRU, LPF, HPF, LSV, HSV
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] For the LSV/HSV types, the amount of boost/cut
THRU, LPF, HPF, LSV, HSV
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] For the LSV/HSV types, the amount of boost/cut
THRU, LPF, HPF, BPF, PKG
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] For the PKG type, the amount of boost/cut
specied frequency
HPF: A lter that passes the sound above the
specied frequency
LSV: A lter that boosts/cuts the sound below
the specied frequency
HSV: A lter that boosts/cuts the sound above
the specied frequency
Frequency at which the pre-distortion lter operates
Type of lter 1 which follows the distortion processing
Frequency at which post-distortion lter 1 operates
Type of lter 2 which follows the distortion processing
Frequency at which post-distortion lter 2 operates
Type of lter 3 which follows the distortion processing
THRU: No lter is applied LPF: A lter that passes the sound below the
specied frequency
HPF: A lter that passes the sound above the
specied frequency
BPF: A lter that passes only the specied
frequency
PKG: A lter that boosts/cuts the specied
frequency
Frequency at which post-distortion lter 3 operates
Parameter Value Explanation
Post3 Q
Sense
PostGain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
0.5–16.0
-60.0–0.0 [dB]
-48.0 +12.0 [dB] Gain following distortion processing
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Drive, Drive Balance, Level
43 W Saturator
Width of the frequency range aected by the lter
Adjust this value so that the sound is not made louder when distortion is applied.
Volume balance between the dry sound (D) and eect sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Worm Saturator)
This is a variety of saturator, and is distinctive for its warmer sound.
Balance D
L in L out
Balance W
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
LowFreq
LowGain
Hi Slope
Hi Freq
Pre1 Type
Pre1Freq
Pre1Gain
Drive
Post1 Type
Post1Frq
Post1Gain
Post2 Type
Post2Frq
Post2Gain
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB]
THRU, -12dB, -24dB
20–16000 [Hz]
THRU, LPF, HPF, LSV, HSV
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB]
0.0–48.0 [dB] Strength of distortion
THRU, LPF, HPF, LSV, HSV
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB]
THRU, LPF, HPF, LSV, HSV
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB]
Input lter (low range) Boosts/cuts the sound below the specied frequency.
Input lter (low range) Amount of boost/cut
Amount of attenuation per octave
THRU: No attenuation
-12 dB: Gentle
-24 dB: Steep
Input lter (high range) Boosts/cuts the sound above the specied frequency.
Types of lter that precedes the distortion processing
THRU: No lter is applied LPF: A lter that passes the sound below the
specied frequency
HPF: A lter that passes the sound above the
specied frequency
LSV: A lter that boosts/cuts the sound below
the specied frequency
HSV: A lter that boosts/cuts the sound above
the specied frequency
Frequency at which the pre-distortion lter operates
For the LSV/HSV types, the amount of boost/ cut
Type of lter 1 which follows the distortion processing
Frequency at which post-distortion lter 1 operates
For the LSV/HSV types, the amount of boost/ cut
Type of lter 2 which follows the distortion processing
Frequency at which post-distortion lter 2 operates
For the LSV/HSV types, the amount of boost/ cut
R outR in
50
Page 51
MFX Parameters
SpeakerSpeaker
Pre AmpPre Amp
SpeakerSpeaker
Bass/Tre-
ble
Bass/Tre-
ble
OverdriveOverdrive
TremoloTremolo
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of lter 3 which follows the distortion processing
THRU: No lter is applied LPF: A lter that passes the sound below the
Post3 Type
Post3Frq
Post3Gain
Post3 Q
Sense
PostGain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
THRU, LPF, HPF, BPF, PKG
20–16000 [Hz]
-24.0–+24.0 [dB] For the PKG type, the amount of boost/cut
0.5–16.0
-60.0–0.0 [dB]
-48.0–+12.0 [dB] Gain following distortion processing
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, LowGain, Hi Freq, Drive, Balance, Level
44 Gt Amp Sim
specied frequency
HPF: A lter that passes the sound above the
specied frequency
BPF: A lter that passes only the specied
frequency
PKG: A lter that boosts/cuts the specied
frequency
Frequency at which post-distortion lter 3 operates
Width of the frequency range aected by the lter
Adjust this value so that the sound is not made louder when distortion is applied.
Volume balance between the dry sound (D) and eect sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Guitar Amp Simulator)
This is an eect that simulates the sound of a guitar amplier.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Amp Sw
ATy p
Drive
Master Lv
Gain
OFF, ON Turns the amp switch on/o.
Type of guitar amp
JC-120 This models the sound of the Roland JC-120.
CLEAN TWIN This models a Fender Twin Reverb.
This models the sound input to left input on a
MATCH DRIVE
BG LEAD
MS1959I
MS1959II
MS1959I+II
SLDN LEAD
METAL 5150 This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH 5150.
METAL LEAD
OD-1
OD-2 TURBO This is the high-gain overdrive sound of the BOSS OD-2.
DISTORTION This gives a basic, traditional distortion sound.
FUZZ A fuzz sound with rich harmonic content.
0–127 Volume and amount of distortion of the amp
0–127 Volume of the entire pre-amp
LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
Matchless D/C-30. A simulation of the latest tube amp widely used in styles from blues rock and fusion.
This models the lead sound of the MESA/ Boogie combo amp. The sound of a tube amp typical of the late ’70s to ’80s.
This models the sound input to Input I on a Marshall
1959. This is a trebly sound suited to hard rock.
This models the sound input to Input II on a Marshall
1959.
The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the guitar amp in parallel, creating a sound with a stronger low end than I.
This models a Soldano SLO-100. This is the typical sound of the eighties.
This is distortion sound that is ideal for performances of heavy ris.
This models the sound of the BOSS OD-1. This produces sweet, mild distortion.
Amount of pre-amp distortion
Pan L
Pan R
L out
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Bass
Middle
Treble
Presence
Bright
Speaker Sw
STyp
Mic Setting
Mic Level
Direct Level
Pan
Level
Asgn1–4
45 EP Amp Sim
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127 Tone for the ultra-high frequency range
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
SMALL 1
SMALL 2
MIDDLE
JC-120
BUILT-IN 1
BUILT-IN 2
BUILT-IN 3
BUILT-IN 4
BUILT-IN 5
BG STACK 1
BG STACK 2
MS STACK 1
MS STACK 2
METAL STACK
2-STACK
3-STACK
1–3
0–127 Volume of the microphone
0–127 Volume of the direct sound
L64–63R Stereo location of the output sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Volume, Master Lv, Pan, Level
Tone of the bass/mid/treble frequency range
Turning this “On” produces a sharper and brighter sound.
* This parameter applies to the “JC-120,” “CLEAN TWIN,”
“MATCH DRIVE,” and “BG LEAD” Pre Amp Types.
Selects whether the sound will be sent through the speaker simulation (ON) or not (OFF)
Cabinet
small open-back
enclosure
small open-back
enclosure
open back enclosure 12 x 1 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large triple stack 12 x 4 condenser
Adjusts the location of the microphone that is recording the sound of the speaker. This can be adjusted in three steps, with the microphone becoming more distant in the order of 1, 2, and 3.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Diameter (in
inches) and number
of the speaker
10 dynamic
10 dynamic
(RD EP Amp Simulator)
Microphone
This is an eect that was developed for the RD series SuperNatural E.Piano.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Bass
Treble
Tremolo Sw
Type
-50–+50 Amount of low-frequency boost/cut
-50–+50 Amount of high-frequency boost/cut
OFF, ON Tremolo on/o
Type of tremolo eect
OLDCASE MO
OLDCASE ST
NEWCASE
DYNO A classic modied electric piano
WURLY A classic electric piano of the ’60s
A standard electric piano sound of the early ’70s (mono)
A standard electric piano sound of the early ’70s (stereo)
A standard electric piano sound of the late ’70s and early ’80s
L out
R out
51
Page 52
MFX Parameters
SpeakerSpeaker
SpeakerSpeaker
CompressorCompressor
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
CompressorCompressor
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
LR
Ò
MS
LR
Ò
MS
MS
Ò
LR
MS
Ò
LR
CompressorCompressor
CompressorCompressor
Parameter Value Explanation
Speed Sync
Speed
Speed Nt
Depth
Shape
AMP
Speaker
Drive
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of the tremolo eect
0–20 Adjusts the waveform of the tremolo.
OFF, ON Turns the speaker and distortion on/o
LINE, OLD, NEW, WURLY, T WIN
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Bass, Treble, Tremolo Sw, Speed, Depth
46 Speaker Sim
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Rate of the tremolo eect
Type of speaker If LINE is selected, the sound will not be sent through the speaker simulation.
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Speaker Simulater)
Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker sound.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Diameter (in inches) and
number of the
speaker
Microphone
Type
Mic Setting
Mic Level
Direct Lv
Level
Asgn1–4
Cabinet
SMALL 1
SMALL 2
MIDDLE
JC-120
BUILT-IN 1
BUILT-IN 2
BUILT-IN 3
BUILT-IN 4
BUILT-IN 5
BG STACK 1
BG STACK 2
MS STACK 1
MS STACK 2
METAL STACK
2-STACK
3-STACK
1–3
0–127 Volume of the microphone
0–127 Volume of the direct sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Mic Level, Direct Level, Level
small open-back enclosure 10 dynamic
small open-back enclosure 10 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 1 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large triple stack 12 x 4 condenser
Adjusts the location of the microphone that is recording the sound of the speaker. This can be adjusted in three steps, with the microphone becoming more distant in the order of 1, 2, and 3.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
52

Comp / Limiter

47 Compressor
Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels, smoothing out uctuations in volume.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Attack
Release
Threshold
Knee
Ratio
Post Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
48 M/S Comp
This eect allows the left/right signals that have similar phase to be adjusted to a dierent sense of volume than the left/right signals that have dierent phase.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
M Comp Sw
M Attack
M Release
M Thres
M Knee
M Ratio
M Gain
S Comp Sw
S Attack
S Release
S Thres
0–124 Sets the speed at which compression starts.
0–124
-60–0 [dB]
0–30 [dB]
1: 1, 1.5: 1, 2: 1, 4: 1, 16: 1, INF: 1
0–+18 [dB] Level of the output sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Attack, Threshold, Level
Adjusts the time after the signal volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied.
Adjusts the volume at which compression begins.
This is a function that smooths the onset of compression from the uncompressed state; it gradually applies compression starting earlier than Threshold. Higher values produce a smoother transition.
Compression ratio
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Mid-Side Compressor)
Mid
Side
OFF, ON
0–124 Sets the speed at which compression starts
0–124
-60–0 [dB]
0–30 [dB]
1: 1, 1.5: 1, 2: 1, 4: 1, 16: 1, INF: 1
0–+18 [dB] Level of the output sound
OFF, ON
0–124 Sets the speed at which compression starts
0–124
-60–0 [dB]
Switches whether to adjust the sense of volume for left/right input signals whose phase is similar (in phase).
Adjusts the time after the signal volume falls below the M Thres Level until compression is no longer applied.
Adjusts the volume at which compression begins.
This is a function that smooths the onset of compression from the uncompressed state; it gradually applies compression starting earlier than M Thres. Higher values produce a smoother transition.
Compression ratio
Switches whether to adjust the sense of volume for left/right input signals whose phase is distant (opposite phase).
Adjusts the time after the signal volume falls below the S Thres Level until compression is no longer applied.
Adjusts the volume at which compression begins.
R outR in
Page 53
MFX Parameters
LimiterLimiter
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
LimiterLimiter
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
SustainerSustainer
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
SustainerSustainer
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Envelope
Controller
Envelope
Controller
GateGate
GateGate
Parameter Value Explanation
This is a function that smooths the onset of
S Knee
S Ratio
S Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
0–30 [dB]
1: 1, 1.5: 1, 2: 1, 4: 1, 16: 1, INF: 1
0–+18 [dB] Level of the output sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, M Attack, M Release, M Threshold, M Post Gain, S Attack, S Release, S Threshold, S Post Gain
compression from the uncompressed state; it gradually applies compression starting earlier than S Thres. Higher values produce a smoother transition.
Compression ratio
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
49 Limiter
Compresses signals that exceed a specied volume level, preventing distortion from occurring.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Release
Threshold
Ratio
Post Gain
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
0–127
1.5: 1, 2: 1, 4: 1, 100: 1 Compression ratio
0–+18 [dB] Level of the output sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Release, Threshold, Level
Adjusts the time after the signal volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied.
Adjusts the volume at which compression begins.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
50 Sustainer
By compressing loud input and boosting low input, this eect keeps the volume consistent to produce a sustain eect without distortion.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Sustain
Attack
Release
Post Gain
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
0–127
0–127 Time until the volume is compressed
0–127 Time until compression is removed
-15–+15 [dB] Level of the output sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
Adjusts the range in which a low input signal is boosted to a consistent volume. Higher values produce longer sustain.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Parameter Value Explanation
Asgn1–4
OFF, Sustain, Attack, Release
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
51 Transient
This eect lets you control the way in which the sound attacks and decays.
L outL in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Attack
Release
Out Gain
Sens
Level
Asgn1–4
-50–+50
-50–+50
-24–+12 [dB] Output gain
LOW, MID, HIGH Quickness with which the attack is detected
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Attack, Release
R out
Character of the attack. Higher values make the attack more aggressive; lower values make the attack milder.
Character of the decay. Higher values make the sound linger; lower values make the sound cuto quickly.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
52 Gate
Cuts the reverb’s delay according to the volume of the sound sent into the eect. Use this when you want to create an articial-sounding decrease in the reverb’s decay.
L in L out
R outR in
Parameter Value Explanation
Threshold
Mode
Attack
Hold
Release
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127 Volume level at which the gate begins to close
Type of gate
GATE: The gate will close when the volume
GATE, DUCK
0–127
0–127
0–127
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Threshold, Balance
of the original sound decreases, cutting the original sound.
DUCK (Duking): The gate will close when the
volume of the original sound increases, cutting the original sound.
Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to fully open after being triggered.
Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to start closing after the source sound falls beneath the Threshold.
Adjusts the time it takes the gate to fully close after the hold time.
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the eect sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
53
Page 54
MFX Parameters
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
DelayDelay
DelayDelay
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
DelayDelay
DelayDelay
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
DelayDelay
ModulationModulation
DelayDelay
ModulationModulation
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
DelayDelay
ModulationModulation
DelayDelay
ModulationModulation

Delay

53 Delay
This is a stereo delay.
When Feedback Mode is NORMAL:
Balance D
L in
Feedback
Feedback
R in
Balance D
When Feedback Mode is CROSS:
Balance D
L in
Feedback
Feedback
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly L Sync
DL. Time
DLTime Nt
Dly R Sync
DR. Time
DRTime Nt
Phase L
Phase R
Fbk Mode
Feedback
HF Damp
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
NORMAL, INVERSE Phase of left and right delay sound
NORMAL, INVERSE
NORMAL, CROSS
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Feedback, Balance
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time until the left delay sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time until the right delay sound is heard.
NORMAL: Non-inverted INVERT: Inverted
Selects the way in which delay sound is fed back into the eect. (See the gures above.)
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the delay sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Balance W
Balance W
Balance W
Balance W
L out
R out
L out
R out
54 Mod Delay
(Modulation Delay)
Adds modulation to the delayed sound.
When Feedback Mode is NORMAL:
Balance D
L in
Feedback
Feedback
R in
Balance D
When Feedback Mode is CROSS:
Balance D
L in
Feedback
Feedback
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly L Sync
DL. Time
DLTime Nt
Dly R Sync
DR. Time
DRTime Nt
Fbk Mode
Feedback
HF Damp
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Depth
Phase
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
NORMAL, CROSS
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–180 [deg] Spatial spread of the sound
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Feedback, Rate (Hz), Balance
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time until the left delay sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time until the right delay sound is heard.
Selects the way in which delay sound is fed back into the eect. (See the gures above.)
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the delay sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
54
Page 55
MFX Parameters
Double Tap
Delay
Double Tap
Delay
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Triple Tap
Delay
Triple Tap
Delay
Quadruple
Tap Delay
Quadruple
Tap Delay
55 2Tap PanDly
(2 Tap Pan Delay)
L in
Delay 1
Feedback
Delay 2
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Delay Sync
D. Time (ms)
D. Time (Nt)
Delay Fbk
Dly HF
Dly1 Pan
Dly2 Pan
Dly1 Lv
Dly2 Lv
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
L64–63R Stereo location of Delay 1
L64–63R Stereo location of Delay 2
0–127 Volume of delay 1
0–127 Volume of delay 2
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, D. Time (ms), Delay Fbk, Balance
56 3Tap PanDly
If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
Adjusts the time until the second delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(3 Tap Pan Delay)
Produces three delay sounds; center, left and right.
Balance D
L in
Left Tap
Balance D
Balance D
Balance W
Balance W
Balance W
L out
R out
L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly R Sync
DR. Time
DRTime Nt
Dly C Sync
DC. Time
DCTime Nt
C Feedback
HF Damp
Left Lv
Right Lv
Center Lv
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
0–127
0–127
0–127
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, C Feedback, Balance
57 4Tap PanDly
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time until the right delay sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time until the center delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Volume of each delay sound
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the delay sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(4 Tap Pan Delay)
This eect has four delays.
L in
Feedback
Delay 1
Delay 2
Delay 3
Delay 4
R in
2 3
1
4
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance D
Center Tap
Feedback
Right Tap
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the
Dly L Sync
DL. Time
DLTime Nt
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time until the left delay sound is heard.
Balance W
R out
L
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly1 Sync
D1. Time
D1Time Nt
Dly2 Sync
D2. Time
D2Time Nt
R
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 1 sounds is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 2 sounds is heard.
55
Page 56
MFX Parameters
Multi Tap
Delay
Multi Tap
Delay
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Rev. DelayRev. Delay
DelayDelay
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly3 Sync
D3. Time
D3Time Nt
Dly4 Sync
D4. Time
D4Time Nt
Dly1 Fbk
HF Damp
Dly1 Lv
Dly2 Lv
Dly3 Lv
Dly4 Lv
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Dly1 Fbk, Balance
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 3 sounds is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 4 sounds is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Volume of each delay
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the delay sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Parameter Value Explanation
D3. Time
D3Time Nt
Dly4 Sync
D4. Time
D4Time Nt
Dly1 Fbk
HF Damp
Dly1 Pan
Dly2 Pan
Dly3 Pan
Dly4 Pan
Dly1 Lv
Dly2 Lv
Dly3 Lv
Dly4 Lv
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
L64–63R
L64–63R
L64–63R
L64–63R
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Dly1 Fbk, Balance
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 3 sounds is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 4 sounds is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Stereo location of Delays 1–4
Volume of each delay
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the eect sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
58 MultiTapDly
(Multi Tap Delay)
This eect has four delays. Each of the Delay Time parameters can be set to a note length based on the selected tempo. You can also set the panning and level of each delay sound.
Balance D
L in
Feedback
Delay 1
Delay 2
Delay 3
Delay 4
Balance W
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly1 Sync
D1. Time
D1Time Nt
Dly2 Sync
D2. Time
D2Time Nt
Dly3 Sync
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 1 sounds is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay 2 sounds is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
L out
R out
56
59 Reverse Dly
(Reverse Delay)
This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed sound to the input sound. A tap delay is connected immediately after the reverse delay.
L outL in
Rev
D1
Feedback
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Threshold
RDly Sync
RD. Time
RD. Time Nt
RDly Fbk
RDly HF
RDly Pan
RDly Level
0–127
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
L64–63R Panning of the reverse delay sound
0–127 Volume of the reverse delay sound
D2D3
R out
Volume at which the reverse delay will begin to be applied
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when sound is input into the reverse delay until the delay sound is heard
Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the reverse delay (negative (-) values invert the phase)
Frequency at which the high-frequency content of the reverse-delayed sound will be cut (BYPASS: no cut)
Page 57
MFX Parameters
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Time Ctrl
Delay
Time Ctrl
Delay
Time Ctrl
Delay
Time Ctrl
Delay
Tape EchoTape Echo
Parameter Value Explanation
Dly1 Sync
D1. Time
D1Time Nt
Dly2 Sync
D2. Time
D2Time Nt
Dly3 Sync
D3. Time
D3Time Nt
Dly3 Fbk
Dly HF
Dly1 Pan
Dly2 Pan
Dly1 Lv
Dly2 Lv
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
L64–63R
L64–63R
0–127
0–127
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, RDly Fbk, Dly3 Fbk, Balance
60 TimeCtrlDly
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when sound is input into the tap delay until the delay sound is heard
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when sound is input into the tap delay until the delay sound is heard
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when sound is input into the tap delay until the delay sound is heard
Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the tap delay (negative (-) values invert the phase)
Frequency at which the hi-frequency content of the tap delay sound will be cut (BYPASS: no cut).
Panning of the tap delay sounds
Volume of the tap delay sounds
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the delay sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Time Control Delay)
A stereo delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly.
Balance D
L in
Balance W
Feedback
Feedback
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Delay Sync
D. Time
D. Time Nt
Acceleration
Feedback
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–15
-98–+98 [%]
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Adjusts the speed which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a specied new setting. The rate of change for the Delay Time directly aects the rate of pitch change.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
L out
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
200, 250, 315, 400,
HF Damp
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, D. Time, Feedback, Balance
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the delay sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
61 Tape Echo
A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound. This simu­lates the tape echo section of a Roland RE-201 Space Echo.
Direct Level
L in
R in
Direct Level
Parameter Value Explanation
Combination of playback heads to use Select from three dierent heads with dierent delay times.
S: short M: middle L: long
Tape speed Increasing this value will shorten the spacing of the delayed sounds.
Boost/cut for the upper range of the echo sound
Independent panning for the short, middle, and long playback heads
Amount of tape-dependent distortion to be added This simulates the slight tonal changes that can be detected by signal-analysis equipment. Increasing this value will increase the distortion.
Speed of wow/utter (complex variation in pitch caused by tape wear and rotational irregularity)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Mode
Repeat Rate
Intensity
Bass
Treble
Head S Pan
Head M Pan
Head L Pan
Distortion
Wf Rate
Wf Depth
Echo Level
Direct Lv
Level
Asgn1–4
S, M, L, S+M, S+L, M+L, S+M+L
0–127
0–127 Amount of delay repeats
-15–+15 [dB] Boost/cut for the lower range of the echo sound
-15–+15 [dB]
L64–63R
L64–63R
L64–63R
0–5
0–127
0–127 Depth of wow/utter
0–127 Volume of the echo sound
0–127 Volume of the original sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Mode, Repeat Rate, Intensity
L out
Echo Level
Echo Level
R out
57
Page 58
MFX Parameters
LR
Ò
MS
LR
Ò
MS
MS
Ò
LR
MS
Ò
LR
Multi-Tap
Delay
Multi-Tap
Delay
Multi-Tap
Delay
Multi-Tap
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Speed Con-
trol
Speed Con-
trol
Speed Con-
trol
Speed Con-
trol
DelayDelay
DelayDelay
Loop Sw
Control
Loop Sw
Control
DelayDelay
DelayDelay
62 M/S Delay
(Mid-Side Delay)
This eect applies dierent amounts of delay to left/right signals of similar phase and diering phase.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
MD Level
MD Mode
MD Tm Sync
MD. Time
MDTime Nt
MD Feedback
MD HFDamp
MD1 Pan
MD2 Pan
MD3 Pan
MD4 Pan
SD Level
SD Mode
SD Tm Sync
SD Time
SDTime Nt
SD Feedback
SD HFDamp
SD1 Pan
SD2 Pan
SD3 Pan
SD4 Pan
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
2TAP, 3TAP, 4TAP
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
L64–63R Panning of the rst delay sound
L64–63R Panning of the second delay sound
L64–63R Panning of the third delay sound
L64–63R Panning of the fourth delay sound
0–127
2TAP, 3TAP, 4TAP
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
L64–63R Panning of the rst delay sound
L64–63R Panning of the second delay sound
L64–63R Panning of the third delay sound
L64–63R Panning of the fourth delay sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, MD Level, MD Feedback, SD Level, SD Feedback
Mid
Side
Delay volume of left/right input signals whose phase is similar (in phase)
Delay divisions for the input signals whose left/ right phase is similar (identical phase)
If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
Adjusts the time from the original sound until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Delay volume of left/right input signals whose phase is distant (opposite phase)
Delay divisions for the input signals whose left/ right phase is distant (reverse phase)
If this is “ON,” the delay synchronizes with the tempo.
Adjusts the time from the original sound until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect is ltered out (BYPASS: no cut).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
R outR in
58

Looper

63 DJFX Looper
Loops a short portion of the input sound. You can vary the playback direction and playback speed of the input sound to add turntable-type eects.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Length
Speed
Loop Sw
Level
Asgn1–4
230–23 (not straight) Species the length of the loop.
Species the playback direction and playback speed.
-1.00–+1.00
OFF, ON
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Length, Speed, Loop Sw
- direction: Reverse playback + direction: Normal playback 0: Stop playback
As the value moves away from 0, the playback speed becomes faster.
If you turn this on while the sound is heard, the sound at that point will be looped. Turn this o to cancel the loop.
* If the eect is recalled with this ON, this parameter
must be turned OFF and then turned ON again in order to make the loop operate.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Speed
Control
Speed
Control
L out
R out
64 BPM Looper
Loops a short portion of the input sound. This can automatically turn the loop on/o in synchronization with the rhythm.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Length
Rate Sync
Rate
Rate Note
Timing
Lenth
230–23 (not straight) Species the length of the loop.
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
1–8
1–8
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Cycle at which the loop automatically turns on/ o
Species the timing within the cycle at which the loop automatically starts (which step of the eight timing divisions at which the sound is heard)
Species the length at which the loop automatically ends within the cycle (the number of times that the 1/8-length of sound is heard)
L out
R out
Page 59
MFX Parameters
CompressorCompressor
Lo-FiLo-Fi
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
CompressorCompressor
Lo-FiLo-Fi
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Bit CrusherBit Crusher
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Bit CrusherBit Crusher
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
PhonographPhonograph
PhonographPhonograph
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Pitch ShifterPitch Shifter
Pitch ShifterPitch Shifter
Parameter Value Explanation
If this is AUTO, the loop automatically turns on/
Loop Mode
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, AUTO, ON
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Length, Rate (Hz)
o in synchronization with the rhythm.
* If the eect is recalled with this ON, this parameter
must rst be set to something other than ON in order to make the loop operate.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.

Lo-Fi

65 LOFI Comp
Degrades the sound quality.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Filter
LoFi Type
Post Filter
Cuto
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
1–6
1–9
OFF, LPF, HPF
200–8000 [Hz] Basic frequency of the Post Filter
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Balance, Level
(Lo-Fi Compressor)
Selects the type of lter applied to the sound before it passes through the Lo-Fi eect.
1: Compressor o 2–6: Compressor on
Degrades the sound quality. The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased.
Type of lter
OFF: No lter is used LPF: Cuts the frequency range above the Cuto
Freq
HPF: Cuts the frequency range below the Cuto
Freq
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the eect sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Parameter Value Explanation
Asgn1–4
OFF, Sample Rate, Filter
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
67 Phonograph
Recreates the sound of an analog record being played on a record player. This lets you simulate the unique noises produced when a record is played, as well as the variations that occur when the record spins.
Balance D
L in
Balance W
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Signal Dist
Frequency
R outR in
Range
Disc Type
Scratch NZ Lev
Dust NZ Lev
Hiss NZ Lev
Total NZ Lev
Wow
Flutter
Random
Total W/F
Balance
Level
0–127 Sets the amount of distortion.
0–127
LP, EP, SP
0–127 Sets the volume of noise created by scratches in the record.
0–127 Sets the volume of noise created by dust on the record.
0–127 Sets the volume of continuous hiss noise.
0–127 Sets the volume of noise overall.
0–127 Sets the amount of variation in record spin (long cycle).
0–127 Sets the amount of variation in record spin (short cycle).
0–127 Sets the amount of non-cyclical variation in record spin.
0–127 Sets the volume of variation in record spin overall.
D100: 0W
-D0: 100W
0–127 Sets the output volume.
Sets the frequency characteristics of the playback system. Smaller values create the feeling of an older system with narrow frequency bands.
Sets the turntable rotation speed. This has an eect on the scratch noise cycle.
Sets the volume balance between the original sound (D) and the eect sound (W).
L out
R out

Pitch

68 PitchShiftr
(Pitch Shifter)
66 Bit Crusher
Produces an extreme lo- eect.
L in L out
Parameter Value Explanation
Sample Rate
Bit Down
Filter
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
0–127 Adjusts the sample rate.
0–20 Adjusts the bit depth.
0–127 Adjusts the lter depth.
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
A stereo pitch shifter.
L in
R outR in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Coarse
Fine
Delay Sync
-24–+12 [sem]
-100–+100
OFF, ON
Adjusts the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps.
Adjusts the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2-cent steps.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
L out
R out
59
Page 60
MFX Parameters
2 Voice Pitch
Shifter
2 Voice Pitch
Shifter
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
OverdriveOverdrive
ChorusChorus
FlangerFlanger
OverdriveOverdrive
Parameter Value Explanation
D. Time
D. Time Nt
Feedback
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
Asgn1–4
69 2V PShifter
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Coarse, Fine, Feedback, Balance
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the pitch shifted sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the pitch shifted sound (W)
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(2 Voice Pitch Shifter)
Shifts the pitch of the original sound. This 2-voice pitch shifter has two pitch shifters, and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the original sound.
Balance D
L in
Level 1
Level 2
Pan 1 L
Pan 1 R
Pan 2 L
Pan 2 R
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
P1Coarse
P1 Fine
P1 Dly Sync
P1D.Time
P1DRate Nt
P1 Feedback
P1 Pan
P1 Level
P2Coarse
P2 Fine
P2 Dly Sync
P2D.Time
P2DRate Nt
P2 Feedback
P2 Pan
P2 Level
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
Level
-24–+12 [sem]
-100–+100
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
L64–63R Stereo location of the Pitch Shift 1 sound
0–127 Volume of the Pitch Shift 1 sound
-24–+12 [sem]
-100–+100
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
-98–+98 [%]
L64–63R
0–127
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift 1 in semitone steps.
Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift Pitch 1 in 2-cent steps.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the Pitch Shift 1 sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Settings of the Pitch Shift 2 sound. The parameters are the same as for the Pitch Shift 1 sound.
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the pitch shifted sound (W)
Balance W
Balance W
L out
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
OFF, P1Coarse, P1
Asgn1–4
Fine, P1 Feedback, P1 Pan, P2Coarse, P2 Fine, P2 Feedback, P2 Pan, Balance
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.

Combination

70 OD Ó Chorus
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
OD Drive
OD Pan
Cho PreDly
Cho Sync
C. Rate
C. Rate Nt
Cho Depth
Cho Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
L64–63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, OD Drive, OD Pan, C. Rate, Cho Bal
71 OD Ó Flanger
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
OD Drive
OD Pan
Flg PreDly
Flg Sync
F. Rate
F. Rate Nt
0–127
L64–63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
(Overdrive Ó Chorus)
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the chorus (W) and the sound that is not sent through the chorus (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Overdrive Ó Flanger)
Feedback
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance D
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance D
60
Page 61
MFX Parameters
DelayDelay
OverdriveOverdrive
DistortionDistortion
ChorusChorus
FlangerFlanger
DistortionDistortion
DelayDelay
DistortionDistortion
Parameter Value Explanation
Flg Depth
Flg Fbk
Flg Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
72 OD Ó Delay
0–127 Depth of modulation
-98–+98 [%]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, OD Drive, OD Pan, F. Rate, Flg Fbk, Flg Bal
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the anger (W) and the sound that is not sent through the anger (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Overdrive Ó Delay)
Balance D
L in
Balance W
Feedback
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
OD Drive 0–127
OD Pan L64–63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound
Delay Sync OFF, ON
D. Time 1–2600
D. Time Nt
Delay Fbk -98–+98 [%]
Dly HF
Dly Bal D100: 0W–D0: 100W
Level 0–127 Output Level
Asgn1–4
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
OFF, OD Drive, OD Pan, Delay Fbk, Dly Bal
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect will be cut (BYPASS: no cut).
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Cho Sync OFF, ON
C. Rate 0.05–10.00 [Hz]
C. Rate Nt
Cho Depth 0–127 Depth of modulation
Cho Bal D100: 0W–D0: 100W
Level 0–127 Output Level
Asgn1–4
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
OFF, Dist Drive, Dist Pan, C. Rate, Cho Bal
74 DS Ó Flanger
L in
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the chorus (W) and the sound that is not sent through the chorus (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Distortion Ó Flanger)
Feedback
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Dist Drive
Dist Pan
Flg PreDly
Flg Sync
F. Rate
F. Rate Nt
Flg Depth
Flg Fbk
Flg Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127
L64–63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
-98–+98 [%]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Dist Drive, Dist Pan, F. Rate, Flg Fbk, Flg Bal
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the anger (W) and the sound that is not sent through the anger (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance D
73 DS Ó Chorus
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Dist Drive 0–127
Dist Pan L64–63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound
Cho PreDly 0.0–100 [ms]
(Distortion Ó Chorus)
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance D
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
75 DS Ó Delay
(Distortion Ó Delay)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Dist Drive
Dist Pan
0–127
L64–63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Feedback
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance D
61
Page 62
MFX Parameters
Touch WahTouch Wah
Over-
drive/Dis-
tortion
Over-
drive/Dis-
tortion
Amp
Simulator
Amp
Simulator
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Auto WahAuto Wah
Over-
drive/Dis-
tortion
Over-
drive/Dis-
tortion
Amp
Simulator
Amp
Simulator
2-Band EQ2-Band EQ
Parameter Value Explanation
Delay Sync
D. Time
D. Time Nt
Delay Fbk
Dly HF
Dly Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Dist Drive, Dist Pan, Delay Fbk, Dly Bal
76 OD/DS
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
T. Wah
Ó
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect will be cut (BYPASS: no cut).
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Overdrive/Distortion Ó Touch Wah)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Drive Switch
D. Type
Drive
Tone
Amp Switch
AmpType
TWah Switch
TWah Mode
TWah Polar
TWah Sens
TWah Manual
TWah Peak
TWah Bal
Low Gain
High Gain
OFF, ON Turns overdrive/distortion on/o
OVERDRIVE, DISTORTION
0–127
0–127 Sound quality of the Overdrive eect
OFF, ON Turns the Amp Simulator on/o.
SMALL, BUILT-IN, 2-STACK, 3-STACK
OFF, ON Wah on/o
LPF, BPF
DOWN, UP
0–127 Sensitivity with which the lter is modied
0–127
0–127
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
Type of distortion
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Type of guitar amp
SMALL: Small amp BUILT-IN: Single-unit type amp 2-STACK: Large double stack amp 3-STACK: Large triple stack amp
Filter type
LPF: The wah eect will be applied over a wide
frequency range.
BPF: The wah eect will be applied over a
narrow frequency range.
Direction in which the lter will move
DOWN: The lter will change toward a lower
frequency.
UP: The lter will change toward a higher
frequency.
Center frequency at which the wah eect is applied
Width of the frequency region at which the wah eect is applied Increasing this value will make the frequency region narrower.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the wah (W) and the sound that is not sent through the wah (D).
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Pan L
Pan R
L out
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Level
Asgn1–4
77 OD/DS
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Drive, Tone, TWah Sens, TWah Manual, TWah Peak, TWah Balance
A. Wah
Ó
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Overdrive/Distortion Ó Auto Wah)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Drive Switch
D. Type
Drive
Tone
Amp Switch
AmpType
AWah Switch
AWah Mode
AWah Manual
AWah Peak
AWah Sync
AWRate
AWRate Nt
AWah Depth
AWah Bal
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
Asgn1–4
OFF, ON Turns overdrive/distortion on/o
OVERDRIVE, DISTORTION
0–127
0–127 Sound quality of the Overdrive eect
OFF, ON Turns the Amp Simulator on/o.
SMALL, BUILT-IN, 2-STACK, 3-STACK
OFF, ON Wah on/o
LPF, BPF
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth at which the wah eect is modulated
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Drive, Tone, AWah Manual, AWah Peak, AWRate, AWah Depth, AWah Bal
Type of distortion
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Type of guitar amp
SMALL: Small amp BUILT-IN: Single-unit type amp 2-STACK: Large double stack amp 3-STACK: Large triple stack amp
Filter type
LPF: The wah eect will be applied over a wide
frequency range.
BPF: The wah eect will be applied over a
narrow frequency range.
Center frequency at which the wah eect is applied
Width of the frequency region at which the wah eect is applied Increasing this value will make the frequency region narrower.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the wah (W) and the sound that is not sent through the wah (D).
Amount of boost/cut for the low-frequency range
Amount of boost/cut for the high-frequency range
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
L out
Pan L
Pan R
R out
62
Page 63
MFX Parameters
SpeakerSpeaker
Pre AmpPre Amp
ChorusChorus
78 Gt Ó Chorus
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Chorus)
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Amp Sw
ATy p
Drive
Master Lv
Gain
Bass
Middle
Treble
Speaker Sw
OFF, ON Turns the amp switch on/o.
Type of guitar amp
JC-120 This models the sound of the Roland JC-120.
CLEAN TWIN This models a Fender Twin Reverb.
This models the sound input to left input on a
MATCH DRIVE
BG LEAD
MS1959I
MS1959II
MS1959I+II
SLDN LEAD
METAL 5150 This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH 5150.
METAL LEAD
OD-1
OD-2 TURBO This is the high-gain overdrive sound of the BOSS OD-2.
DISTORTION This gives a basic, traditional distortion sound.
FUZZ A fuzz sound with rich harmonic content.
0–127 Volume and amount of distortion of the amp
0–127 Volume of the entire pre-amp
LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
Matchless D/C-30. A simulation of the latest tube amp widely used in styles from blues and rock.
This models the lead sound of the MESA/ Boogie combo amp. The sound of a tube amp typical of the late ’70s to ’80s.
This models the sound input to Input I on a Marshall
1959. This is a trebly sound suited to hard rock.
This models the sound input to Input II on a Marshall
1959.
The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the guitar amp in parallel, creating a sound with a stronger low end than I.
This models a Soldano SLO-100. This is the typical sound of the eighties.
This is distortion sound that is ideal for performances of heavy ris.
This models the sound of the BOSS OD-1. This produces sweet, mild distortion.
Amount of pre-amp distortion
Tone of the bass/mid/treble frequency range
Selects whether the sound will be sent through the speaker simulation (ON) or not (OFF).
Balance D
Balance D
Balance W
Balance W
L outL in
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Cabinet
small open-back
enclosure
small open-back
enclosure
open back enclosure 12 x 1 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large triple stack 12 x 4 condenser
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the chorus (W) and the sound that is not sent through the chorus (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
STyp
Chorus Sw
Cho PreDly
C. Rate
Cho Depth
Cho Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
SMALL 1
SMALL 2
MIDDLE
JC-120
BUILT-IN 1
BUILT-IN 2
BUILT-IN 3
BUILT-IN 4
BUILT-IN 5
BG STACK 1
BG STACK 2
MS STACK 1
MS STACK 2
METAL STACK
2-STACK
3-STACK
OFF, ON Chorus on/o
0.0–100 [ms]
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Frequency of modulation
0–127 Depth of modulation
D100: 0W– D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Volume, Master Lv, Chorus Sw, C. Rate, Cho Depth, Cho Bal
Diameter (in inches)
and number of
the speaker
10 dynamic
10 dynamic
Microphone
63
Page 64
MFX Parameters
FlangerFlanger
Pre AmpPre Amp
SpeakerSpeaker
79 Gt Ó Flanger
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Flanger)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Amp Sw
ATy p
Drive
Master Lv
Gain
Bass
Middle
Treble
Speaker Sw
OFF, ON Turns the amp switch on/o.
Type of guitar amp
JC-120 This models the sound of the Roland JC-120.
CLEAN TWIN This models a Fender Twin Reverb.
This models the sound input to left input on a
MATCH DRIVE
BG LEAD
MS1959I
MS1959II
MS1959I+II
SLDN LEAD
METAL 5150 This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH 5150.
METAL LEAD
OD-1
OD-2 TURBO This is the high-gain overdrive sound of the BOSS OD-2.
DISTORTION This gives a basic, traditional distortion sound.
FUZZ A fuzz sound with rich harmonic content.
0–127 Volume and amount of distortion of the amp
0–127 Volume of the entire pre-amp
LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
Matchless D/C-30. A simulation of the latest tube amp widely used in styles from blues and rock.
This models the lead sound of the MESA/ Boogie combo amp. The sound of a tube amp typical of the late ’70s to ’80s.
This models the sound input to Input I on a Marshall
1959. This is a trebly sound suited to hard rock.
This models the sound input to Input II on a Marshall
1959.
The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the guitar amp in parallel, creating a sound with a stronger low end than I.
This models a Soldano SLO-100. This is the typical sound of the eighties.
This is distortion sound that is ideal for performances of heavy ris.
This models the sound of the BOSS OD-1. This produces sweet, mild distortion.
Amount of pre-amp distortion
Tone of the bass/mid/treble frequency range
Selects whether the sound will be sent through the speaker simulation (ON) or not (OFF)
Feedback
Balance D
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Cabinet
small open-back
enclosure
small open-back
enclosure
open back enclosure 12 x 1 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large triple stack 12 x 4 condenser
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the anger (W) and the sound that is not sent through the anger (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
STyp
Flg Switch
Flg PreDly
F. Rate
Flg Depth
Flg Fbk
Flg Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
SMALL 1
SMALL 2
MIDDLE
JC-120
BUILT-IN 1
BUILT-IN 2
BUILT-IN 3
BUILT-IN 4
BUILT-IN 5
BG STACK 1
BG STACK 2
MS STACK 1
MS STACK 2
METAL STACK
2-STACK
3-STACK
OFF, ON Flanger on/o
0.0–100 [ms]
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Frequency of modulation
0–127 Depth of modulation
-98–+98 [%]
D100: 0W– D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Volume, Master Lv, Flg Switch, F. Rate, Flg Depth, Flg Fbk, Flg Bal
Diameter (in inches)
and number of the
speaker
10 dynamic
10 dynamic
Microphone
64
Page 65
MFX Parameters
PhaserPhaser
Pre AmpPre Amp
SpeakerSpeaker
80 Gt Ó Phaser
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Phaser)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Amp Sw
ATy p
Drive
Master Lv
Gain
Bass
Middle
Treble
Speaker Sw
OFF, ON Turns the amp switch on/o.
Type of guitar amp
JC-120 This models the sound of the Roland JC-120.
CLEAN TWIN This models a Fender Twin Reverb.
This models the sound input to left input on a
MATCH DRIVE
BG LEAD
MS1959I
MS1959II
MS1959I+II
SLDN LEAD
METAL 5150 This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH 5150.
METAL LEAD
OD-1
OD-2 TURBO This is the high-gain overdrive sound of the BOSS OD-2.
DISTORTION This gives a basic, traditional distortion sound.
FUZZ A fuzz sound with rich harmonic content.
0–127 Volume and amount of distortion of the amp
0–127 Volume of the entire pre-amp
LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
Matchless D/C-30. A simulation of the latest tube amp widely used in styles from blues and rock.
This models the lead sound of the MESA/ Boogie combo amp. The sound of a tube amp typical of the late ’70s to ’80s.
This models the sound input to Input I on a Marshall
1959. This is a trebly sound suited to hard rock.
This models the sound input to Input II on a Marshall
1959.
The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the guitar amp in parallel, creating a sound with a stronger low end than I.
This models a Soldano SLO-100. This is the typical sound of the eighties.
This is distortion sound that is ideal for performances of heavy ris.
This models the sound of the BOSS OD-1. This produces sweet, mild distortion.
Amount of pre-amp distortion
Tone of the bass/mid/treble frequency range
Selects whether the sound will be sent through the speaker simulation (ON) or not (OFF).
Resonance
Mix
L out
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Cabinet
small open-back
enclosure
small open-back
enclosure
open back enclosure 12 x 1 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large triple stack 12 x 4 condenser
Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
STyp
Phaser Sw
P. Rate
Phs Manual
Phs Depth
Phs Reso
Phs Mix
Level
Asgn1–4
SMALL 1
SMALL 2
MIDDLE
JC-120
BUILT-IN 1
BUILT-IN 2
BUILT-IN 3
BUILT-IN 4
BUILT-IN 5
BG STACK 1
BG STACK 2
MS STACK 1
MS STACK 2
METAL STACK
2-STACK
3-STACK
OFF, ON Phaser on/o
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Frequency of modulation
0–127
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–127 Amount of feedback
0–127 Level of the phase-shifted sound
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Volume, Master Lv, Phaser Sw, P. Rate, Phs Manual, Phs Depth, Phs Reso, Phs Mix
Diameter (in inches)
and number of the
speaker
10 dynamic
10 dynamic
Microphone
65
Page 66
MFX Parameters
DelayDelay
Pre AmpPre Amp
SpeakerSpeaker
81 Gt Ó Delay
(Guitar Amp Simulator Ó Delay)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Pre Amp Sw
ATy p
Drive
Master Lv
Gain
Bass
Middle
Treble
Speaker Sw
OFF, ON Turns the amp switch on/o.
Type of guitar amp
JC-120 This models the sound of the Roland JC-120.
CLEAN TWIN This models a Fender Twin Reverb.
This models the sound input to left input on a
MATCH DRIVE
BG LEAD
MS1959I
MS1959II
MS1959I+II
SLDN LEAD
METAL 5150 This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH 5150.
METAL LEAD
OD-1
OD-2 TURBO This is the high-gain overdrive sound of the BOSS OD-2.
DISTORTION This gives a basic, traditional distortion sound.
FUZZ A fuzz sound with rich harmonic content.
0–127 Volume and amount of distortion of the amp
0–127 Volume of the entire pre-amp
LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, ON
Matchless D/C-30. A simulation of the latest tube amp widely used in styles from blues and rock.
This models the lead sound of the MESA/ Boogie combo amp. The sound of a tube amp typical of the late ’70s to ’80s.
This models the sound input to Input I on a Marshall
1959. This is a trebly sound suited to hard rock.
This models the sound input to Input II on a Marshall
1959.
The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the guitar amp in parallel, creating a sound with a stronger low end than I.
This models a Soldano SLO-100. This is the typical sound of the eighties.
This is distortion sound that is ideal for performances of heavy ris.
This models the sound of the BOSS OD-1. This produces sweet, mild distortion.
Amount of pre-amp distortion
Tone of the bass/mid/treble frequency range
Selects whether the sound will be sent through the speaker simulation (ON) or not (OFF).
Feedback
Balance D
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Cabinet
small open-back
enclosure
small open-back
enclosure
open back enclosure 12 x 1 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
open back enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large double stack 12 x 4 condenser
large triple stack 12 x 4 condenser
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Frequency at which the high-frequency portion of the delay sound will be cut (BYPASS: no cut)
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
STyp
Delay Sw
Dly Time
Delay Fbk
Dly HF
Dly Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
SMALL 1
SMALL 2
MIDDLE
JC-120
BUILT-IN 1
BUILT-IN 2
BUILT-IN 3
BUILT-IN 4
BUILT-IN 5
BG STACK 1
BG STACK 2
MS STACK 1
MS STACK 2
METAL STACK
2-STACK
3-STACK
OFF, ON Delay on/o
1–1300
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
D100: 0W– D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Volume, Master Lv, Delay Sw, Dly Time, Delay Fbk, Dly Bal
Diameter (in inches)
and number of the
speaker
10 dynamic
10 dynamic
Microphone
66
Page 67
MFX Parameters
SpeakerSpeaker
EP AmpEP Amp
TremoloTremolo
SpeakerSpeaker
EP AmpEP Amp
ChorusChorus
FlangerFlanger
EP AmpEP Amp
SpeakerSpeaker
82 EP Ó Tremolo
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Tremolo)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of amp
OLDCASE A standard electric piano sound of the early ’70s
Type
Bass
Treble
Tremolo Sw
Tremolo Sync
T. Speed
T. Spd Nt
Trm Depth
Trm Duty
Sp Type
OD Switch
OD Gain
OD Drive
Level
Asgn1–4
NEWCASE
WURLY A standard electric piano sound of the ’60s
-50–+50 Amount of low-frequency boost/cut
-50–+50 Amount of high-frequency boost/cut
OFF, ON Tremolo on/o
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of the tremolo eect
-10–+10
LINE, OLD, NEW, WURLY, T WIN
OFF, ON Overdrive on/o
0–127 Overdrive input level
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Bass, Treble, Tremolo Sw, T. Speed, Trm Depth
83 EP Ó Chorus
A standard electric piano sound of the late ’70s and early ’80s
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Rate of the tremolo eect
Adjusts the duty cycle of the LFO waveform used to apply tremolo.
Type of speaker If LINE is selected, the sound will not be sent through the speaker simulation.
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Chorus)
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of amp
Type
Bass
Treble
Cho Switch
Cho PreDly
Cho Sync
C. Rate
C. Rate Nt
Cho Depth
OLDCASE
NEWCASE
-50–+50 Amount of low-frequency boost/cut
-50–+50 Amount of high-frequency boost/cut
OFF, ON Chorus on/o
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
A standard electric piano sound of the early ’70s
A standard electric piano sound of the late ’70s and early ’80s
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Balance D
Balance D
L out
R out
Balance W
Balance W
L outL in
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Adjusts the volume balance between the
Cho Bal
Sp Type
OD Switch
OD Gain
OD Drive
Level
Asgn1–4
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
LINE, OLD, NEW, WURLY, T WIN
OFF, ON Overdrive on/o
0–127 Overdrive input level
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Bass, Treble, Cho Switch, C. Rate, Cho Depth, Cho Bal
84 EP Ó Flanger
sound that is sent through the chorus (W) and the sound that is not sent through the chorus (D).
Type of speaker If LINE is selected, the sound will not be sent through the speaker simulation.
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Flanger)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of amp
Type
Bass
Treble
Flg Switch
Flg PreDly
Flg Sync
F. Rate
F. Rate Nt
Flg Depth
Flg Fbk
Flg Bal
Sp Type
OD Switch
OD Gain
OD Drive
Level
Asgn1–4
OLDCASE
NEWCASE
-50–+50 Amount of low-frequency boost/cut
-50–+50 Amount of high-frequency boost/cut
OFF, ON Flanger on/o
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
-98–+98 [%]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
LINE, OLD, NEW, WURLY, T WIN
OFF, ON Overdrive on/o
0–127 Overdrive input level
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Bass, Treble, Flg Switch, F. Rate, Flg Depth, Flg Fbk, Flg Bal
A standard electric piano sound of the early ’70s
A standard electric piano sound of the late ’70s and early ’80s
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the anger (W) and the sound that is not sent through the anger (D).
Type of speaker If LINE is selected, the sound will not be sent through the speaker simulation.
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Feedback
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance D
67
Page 68
MFX Parameters
PhaserPhaser
EP AmpEP Amp
SpeakerSpeaker
Time Ctrl
Delay
Time Ctrl
Delay
EP AmpEP Amp
SpeakerSpeaker
ChorusChorus
EnhancerEnhancer
EnhancerEnhancer
85 EP Ó Phaser
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Phaser)
L in
R in
Resonance
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of amp
Type
Bass
Treble
Phs Switch
Phs Sync
P. Rate
P. Rate Nt
Phs Manual
Phs Depth
Phs Reso
Phs Mix
Sp Type
OD Switch
OD Gain
OD Drive
Level
Asgn1–4
86 EP Ó Delay
OLDCASE A standard electric piano sound of the early ’70s
NEWCASE
-50–+50 Amount of low-frequency boost/cut
-50–+50 Amount of high-frequency boost/cut
OFF, ON Phaser on/o
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127
0–127 Depth of modulation
0–127 Amount of feedback
0–127 Level of the phase-shifted sound
LINE, OLD, NEW, WURLY, T WIN
OFF, ON Overdrive on/o
0–127 Overdrive input level
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Bass, Treble, Phs Switch, P. Rate, Phs Manual, Phs Depth, Phs Reso, Phs Mix
A standard electric piano sound of the late ’70s and early ’80s
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated.
Type of speaker If LINE is selected, the sound will not be sent through the speaker simulation.
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(EP Amp Simulator Ó Delay)
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Type of amp
Type
Bass
Treble
Dly Switch
Delay Sync
D. Time
D. Time Nt
OLDCASE A standard electric piano sound of the early 70s
NEWCASE
-50–+50 Amount of low-frequency boost/cut
-50–+50 Amount of high-frequency boost/cut
OFF, ON Delay on/o
OFF, ON
1–1300
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
A standard electric piano sound of the late 70s and early 80s
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Feedback
Mix
Balance D
Balance D
L out
R out
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
Speed at which the current delay time changes
Dly Accel
Delay Fbk
Dly HF
Dly Bal
Sp Type
OD Switch
OD Gain
OD Drive
Level
Asgn1–4
0–15
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
LINE, OLD, NEW, WURLY, T WIN
OFF, ON Overdrive on/o
0–127 Overdrive input level
0–127
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Bass, Treble, Dly Switch, D. Time, Delay Fbk
87 Enhncr Ó Cho
to the specied delay time when you change the delay time. The speed of the pitch change will change simultaneously with the delay time.
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Frequency at which the high-frequency portion of the delay sound will be cut (BYPASS: no cut)
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Type of speaker If LINE is selected, the sound will not be sent through the speaker simulation.
Degree of distortion Also changes the volume.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Enhancer Ó Chorus)
L in
Mix
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
Enh Sens
Enh Mix
Cho PreDly
Cho Sync
C. Rate
C. Rate Nt
Cho Depth
Cho Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
0–127 Sensitivity of the enhancer
0–127
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Enh Sens, Enh Mix, C. Rate, Cho Bal
Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the chorus (W) and the sound that is not sent through the chorus (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance DMix
68
Page 69
MFX Parameters
FlangerFlanger
EnhancerEnhancer
EnhancerEnhancer
DelayDelay
EnhancerEnhancer
EnhancerEnhancer
DelayDelay
ChorusChorus
88 Enhncr Ó Fl
(Enhancer Ó Flanger)
L in
Mix
R in
Mix
Parameter Value Explanation
Enh Sens
Enh Mix
Flg PreDly
Flg Sync
F. Rate
F. Rate Nt
Flg Depth
Flg Fbk
Flg Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
89 Enhncr Ó Dly
0–127 Sensitivity of the enhancer
0–127
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
-98–+98 [%]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, Enh Sens, Enh Mix, F. Rate, Flg Fbk, Flg Bal
Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the anger (W) and the sound that is not sent through the anger (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Enhancer Ó Delay)
L in
Mix
R in
Mix
Parameter Value Explanation
Enh Sens
Enh Mix
Delay Sync
D. Time
D. Time Nt
Delay Fbk
Dly HF
Dly Bal
Level
0–127 Sensitivity of the enhancer
0–127
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect will be cut (BYPASS: no cut).
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Balance D
Feedback
Balance D
Balance D
Feedback
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
OFF, Enh Sens, Enh
Asgn1–4
Mix, D. Time, Delay Fbk, Dly Bal
90 Chorus Ó Dly
Balance D
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
(Chorus Ó Delay)
L in
Balance W
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Cho PreDly
Cho Sync
C. Rate
C. Rate Nt
Cho Depth
Cho Bal
Delay Sync
D. Time
D. Time Nt
Delay Fbk
Dly HF
Dly Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, C. Rate, Cho Bal, Delay Fbk, Dly Bal
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the chorus sound (W)
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect will be cut (BYPASS: no cut).
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Balance D
Feedback
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
69
Page 70
MFX Parameters
DelayDelay
FlangerFlanger
FlangerFlanger
ChorusChorus
91 Flanger Ó Dly
Balance D
(Flanger Ó Delay)
L in
Feedback
Balance W
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Flg PreDly
Flg Sync
F. Rate
F. Rate Nt
Flg Depth
Flg Fbk
Flg Bal
Delay Sync
D. Time
D. Time Nt
Delay Fbk
Dly HF
Dly Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Depth of modulation
-98–+98 [%]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
OFF, ON
1–2600
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
-98–+98 [%]
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS [Hz]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, F. Rate, Flg Fbk, Flg Bal, Delay Fbk, Dly Bal
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Frequency of modulation
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the anger sound (W)
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard
Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the eect will be cut (BYPASS: no cut).
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay (W) and the sound that is not sent through the delay (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Balance D
Feedback
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
92 Chorus Ó Fl
Balance D
(Chorus Ó Flanger)
L in
Balance W
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Parameter Value Explanation
Cho PreDly
Cho Sync
C. Rate
C. Rate Nt
Cho Depth
Cho Bal
Flg PreDly
Flg Sync
F. Rate
F. Rate Nt
Flg Depth
Flg Fbk
Flg Bal
Level
Asgn1–4
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Modulation depth of the chorus eect
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0.0–100 [ms]
OFF, ON
0.05–10.00 [Hz]
Note
Ø“Note” (p. 72)
0–127 Modulation depth of the anger eect
-98–+98 [%]
D100: 0W–D0: 100W
0–127 Output Level
OFF, C. Rate, Cho Bal, F. Rate, Flg Fbk, Flg Bal
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Modulation frequency of the chorus eect
Volume balance between the direct sound (D) and the chorus sound (W)
Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the anger sound is heard.
If this is “ON,” the rate synchronizes with the tempo of the rhythm.
Ø“Tempo” (p. 3, p. 31)
Modulation frequency of the anger eect
Adjusts the proportion of the anger sound that is fed back into the eect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the anger (W) and the sound that is not sent through the anger (D).
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
Balance D
Feedback
Balance D
L out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
70
Page 71
MFX Parameters
SpectrumSpectrum
DistortionDistortion
PhaserPhaser
EnhancerEnhancer
93 JD Multi
Recreates the eects included in group A of the JD-800.
L in
R in
Parameter Value Explanation
DS - PH - SP - EN
DS - PH - EN - SP
DS - SP - PH - EN
DS - SP - EN - PH
DS - EN - PH - SP
DS - EN - SP - PH
PH - DS - SP - EN
PH - DS - EN - SP
PH - SP - DS - EN
Seq
DS Switch
DS Type
DS Drive
DS Level
PH Switch
PH Manual
PH Rate
PH Depth
PH Resonance
PH Mix
SP Switch
SP Band Ctrl1
SP Band Ctrl2
SP Band Ctrl3
PH - SP - EN - DS
PH - EN - DS - SP
PH - EN - SP - DS
SP - DS - PH - EN
SP - DS - EN - PH
SP - PH - DS - EN
SP - PH - EN - DS
SP - EN - DS - PH
SP - EN - PH - DS
EN - DS - PH - SP
EN - DS - SP - PH
EN - PH - DS - SP
EN - PH - SP - DS
EN - SP - DS - PH
EN - SP - PH - DS
OFF, ON Turns the distortion on/o.
Sets the type of distortion.
MELLOW DRV Softer distortion with a slightly darker sound.
OVERDRIVE
CRY DRV Distortion that emphasizes the high end.
MELLOW DST
LIGHT DST Strong distortion with a bright sound.
FAT DIST
FUZZ DIST
0–100 Sets the amount of distortion.
0–100 Sets the distortion output level.
OFF, ON ØTurns the phaser on/o.
50 [Hz]–
15.0 [kHz]
0.1–10.0 [Hz] Sets the cycle of the phaser modulation.
0–100 Sets the depth of the phaser modulation.
0–100
0–100 Sets the level of the phase-shifted sound.
OFF, ON Turns the spectrum on/o.
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
Selects the connection order of the eects.
DS: Distortion PH: Phaser SP: Spectrum EN: Enhancer
Distortion that resembles a vacuum tube amp being driven.
Gives the feeling of distortion playing through a large amp.
Thick distortion that emphasizes the low and high ends.
Distortion that’s even more powerful that FAT DIST.
Sets the basic frequency from which the sound is modulated with the phaser eect.
Sets the amount of feedback for the phaser. Increasing the value creates a more unusual sound.
Sets the gain (amount of boost/cut) in the 250 Hz range.
Sets the gain (amount of boost/cut) in the 500 Hz range.
Sets the gain (amount of boost/cut) in the 1000 Hz range.
L out
R out
Parameter Value Explanation
SP Band Ctrl4
SP Band Ctrl5
SP Band Ctrl6
SP Width
EH Switch
EH Sens
EH Mix
Pan
Level
Asgn1–4
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
-15–+15 [dB]
1–5
ØOFF, ON Turns the enhancer on/o.
0–100 Sets how easily the enhancer eect is applied.
0–100
L64–63R Changes the pan.
0–127 Sets the output volume.
OFF, Band2 Thrs, Band2 Gain, Band3 Thrs, Band3 Gain
Sets the gain (amount of boost/cut) in the 2000 Hz range.
Sets the gain (amount of boost/cut) in the 4000 Hz range.
Sets the gain (amount of boost/cut) in the 8000 Hz range.
Sets the bandwidth for changing the levels, common to all bands.
Sets the ratio at which the harmonics generated by the enhancer are mixed with the original sound.
Species the parameters that are assigned to assign 1–4.
71
Page 72
MFX Parameters

Note

1/64T
1/32
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/2
1
2
Sixty-fourth-note triplet
Thirty-second note
Sixteenth note
Eighth note
Quarter note
Half note
Whole note
Double note
1/64
1/16T
1/8T
1/4T
1/2T
1T
2T
Sixty-fourth note
Sixteenth-note triplet
Eighth-note triplet
Quarter-note triplet
Half-note triplet
Whole-note triplet
Double-note triplet
1/32T
1/32.
1/16.
1/8.
1/4.
1/2.
1.
Thirty-second­note triplet
Dotted thirty­second note
Dotted sixteenth note
Dotted eighth note
Dotted quarter note
Dotted half note
Dotted whole note
72
Loading...